YFP 286: YFP Planning Case Study #5: Modeling Retirement Scenarios and How to Handle a Large Cash Position


YFP Co-Founder & Director of Financial Planning, Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP® is joined by Kelly Reddy-Heffner, CFP®, CSLP®, CDFA®, and Christina Slavonik, CFP® to discuss retirement scenarios and how to handle a large cash position in this YFP Planning Case Study. 

About Today’s Guests

Kelly Reddy-Heffner, CFP®, CSLP®, CDFA®

Kelly Reddy-Heffner, CFP®, CSLP®, CDFA® is a Lead Planner at YFP Planning. She enjoys time with her husband and two sons, riding her bike, running, and keeping after her pup ‘Fred Rogers.’ Kelly loves to cheer on her favorite team, plan travel, and ironically loves great food but does not enjoy cooking at all. She volunteers in her community as part of the Chambersburg Rotary. Kelly believes that there are no quick fixes to financial confidence, and no guarantees on investment returns, but there is value in seeking trusted advice to get where you want to go. Kelly’s mission is to help clients go confidently toward their happy place.

Christina Slavonik, CFP®

Christina is a Certified Financial Planner™ located in Texas and has over 15 years of financial planning and industry experience. She received her Certificate in Financial Planning from Southern Methodist University.

Christina is passionate about helping clients live their best lives now while not losing sight of the future. She enjoys the collaborative approach of creating a custom financial plan with her team at YFP.

Episode Summary

YFP Co-Founder & Director of Financial Planning, Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP®, is joined by Kelly Reddy-Heffner, CFP®, CSLP®, CDFA®, and Christina Slavonik, CFP® to discuss various retirement scenarios and how to handle a large cash position in this YFP Planning Case Study. Tim Baker introduces the fifth case study, examining the fictitious couple, Jane Smith and Tyra Lee, from Westchester, Pennsylvania. Jane, age 59, is a Certified Registered Nurse Anesthetist, and Tyra, age 60, is a pharmacist working part-time. Jane and Tyra also have two teenage boys, Thomas and Robert. During the discussion on this case study, listeners will learn about the couple’s plans to retire in three to five years, earlier than previously expected. Tim, Kelly, and Christina discuss options for care and long-term care insurance concerning Jane’s elderly mother, college plans, and a recent car purchase for their children. The discussion leads to considerations for how the couple might handle their massive cash position and whether or not to pay off debts with their reserves. Tim, Kelly, and Christina talk through the couple’s housing situation as they transition to retirement, their plans for purchasing a cabin or potential forever home, and how that may impact the financial plan.  

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRODUCTION]

[00:00:00] TB: You’re listening to the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast, a show all about inspiring you, the pharmacy professional on your path towards achieving financial freedom. 

Hi, I’m Tim Baker and today I chat with two important team members at YFP planning Kelly Reddy-Heffner and Christina Slavonik, both CFPs.

In this episode, we discuss our fifth case study of a fictitious couple Jane Smith and Tyra Lee, and their teenage kids Thomas and Robert. Jane is 59 and is a certified registered nurse anesthetist while Tyra, age 60, is a pharmacist working part time. We cover a bevy of topics that include in retirement in three to five years, where we model out different scenarios using our financial planning software. We chat about long-term care insurance, how to handle their massive cash position, and whether they should pay off some debt, their housing situation as they transition into retirement, college planning for the boys, and potentially how to handle care for Jane’s elder mother.

[INTERVIEW]

[00:00:58] TB: What’s up everybody? Welcome to YFP planning case study number five. So, I am joined today by Christina Slavonik and Kelly Reddy-Heffner, two of our CFPs on the YFP planning team. So, Kelly and Christina, welcome.

[00:01:14] CS: Thank you, Tim.

[00:01:15] KRH: Thanks, Tim.

[00:01:17] TB: So, we are recording this right before Thanksgiving. So, excited to get this recorded in the books and then enjoy some time off with family. I just would like to say that we are very thankful for all the listeners out there, thankful for the community that we’ve built, thankful for the two of you, Christina and Kelly being part of the team. And yeah, just really excited for the upcoming holiday season. Let’s jump into it.

So today, we are exploring a couple in Westchester, Pennsylvania, Jane Smith, and Tyra Lee. So, Christina, you’re going to take us through the first part of the fact pattern, Kelly is going to get into goals. And then, I’m going to talk about the wealth building, wealth protection tax and some of the miscellaneous stuff. And then we are going to dissect this client case study and see what are some planning opportunities? What are the things that should be discussed with the client, that we should really get in front of to make sure that they are on track with their financial plan? So, Christina, if you please kick us off on Jane Smith and Tyra Lee.

[00:02:18] CS: Sure. So, the clients we’re looking at today are Jane Smith, who is a CRNA, aged 59, makes about 194,000 a year and Tyra Lee, who’s a part time pharmacist, age 60, salary is 65,000. They are married filing jointly. They have two sons. I have Thomas, who is age 17, and is currently a student, and Robert, who was 14 and currently a student as well. They reside in Westchester, Pennsylvania, annual gross income is 259,000, which breaks down into monthly around 22,000, and then net after taxes and whatnot, 15,000.

Expenses for these people are fixed at about $5,977 a month. Variable expenses are the 4,500 a month, and the savings of about 4,400 or so. Their current living situation is they’re in a five-bedroom, single-family home outside of Philadelphia. They apparently have a great first floor master. And if Jane’s mom had to move in, they could accommodate her as she is ill and cash resources are currently limited.

[00:03:37] KRH: Complicated, right? This seems like a scenario that we’re seeing a little bit more of with some of our like pre-retiree clients, just that intersection between nearly adult children, but not quite adult and parents kind of having some needs as well. They both would like to retire over the next couple years. But they are thinking through making sure the children are taken care of, parent needs are also taken care of. They have a fairly large cash position and are not sure if they should leave it in cash or pay off some things. They have that home in Philadelphia that they like, it’s functional, but they’re not sure that this is the forever home where they want to stay indefinitely.

With the kid’s college tuitions, one tuition has is about to start, I think based on the age. One is a little bit further in the future, but they kind of want to see what the 529s are going to cover, and what they can maybe do out of pocket and what they simply can’t do. They’ve asked about long-term care insurance, kind of understanding the premiums and how those could change in the future. They might want to buy a lake cabin, maybe that could be the forever home or the primary residents. If they wanted to retire earlier, they had started at age 65. Could they do it like 62, 63? They’ve got a little bit of debt. They have a car note for their own vehicle, 1.9% interest rate. There’s three years left on that note. They also bought a car for the teenage children, so there is a payment of 545 per month, interest rates 2.25, three years also left on that. Obviously, they made those purchases prior to our current interest rates, or it would be much higher. They also have a reasonable interest rate on their mortgage at 2.75. But it is a pretty recent purchase. So, the amount left on the mortgage is pretty high and that monthly payment is 2,858. So, early in that, and that’s one of their questions.

[00:05:58] TB: So, picking up on the asset side of the of the ledger, Kelly had mentioned that they do have a good amount of savings tucked away. So, 143,000 in a joint savings account, 3,000 in check in, and then another 9,000 in an HAS that’s Jane’s. From a 401(k) perspective, looks like Jane is putting in 11%, which is the max for 2022, 20,500 into her fidelity 401(k) through her employer that’s invested in a target date fund for 2030. Tyra also has a 401(k). She’s putting in 31.5%, which is also max amount of 20,500.

Now, for the two of them, one of the things we’ll talk about that you have a catch up available if they want to do that, but she’s also her Vanguard, she’s in a Vanguard target date 2030. Jane has a Roth IRA. This is from a previous employer. It’s invested in a Vanguard 2030 fund. She’s not contributing anything to that presently. Tyra has a SEP IRA from her previous consulting work as a pharmacist. It’s 100% in the S&P 500. So obviously, there’s some little bit differences there in their allocation. And then they also have a taxable account that they’re putting in about two grand a year, $167 a month into a Vanguard target date 2060 fund.

So, it looks like this is going to be maybe a retirement fund, maybe for the boys. We have to kind of get some clarity on that. They do have a primary home that’s valued at 920,000 versus the 683,000 and change that’s left. And then, looking to potentially, maybe buyout another property that they could transition to. We’ll talk about that in a bit.

Overall, you’re looking at total assets, about 1.9 million, total liabilities of just over 725,000. So, net worth is about $1.25 million. We look at the wealth protection stuff. Jane has an individual policy, 1.5 million that expires at age 65. She also has a group policy through employer which is one-time income 194,000. Tyra has a $750,000 policy that also expires at age 65. And then she also has a onetime group policy through employer which is 65,000. They both have short term and long-term disability through their employer that pays out a 60% benefit for short term and long-term disability. They both have their own professional liability policies. And the estate planning documents are up to date.

But one of the things that they’re not sure of is if Jane’s mother has anything, which obviously can affect their financial plan. From a tax perspective, they use YFP Tax. So, thank you very much for that. They’re concerned about their pretax retirement investments and when Roth conversions might be helpful, so obviously there could be time where they’re maybe sunset into retirement, so they might be in a lower tax bracket. So, it might be beneficial to convert some funds over to the Roth. And then Tyra is willing to work more over the next several years if both can retire early. They’re wondering if they should pay off their debt based on the interest rates, and they also want to make sure that they are maximizing the FASFA for their sons.

So, a lot of stuff to talk about. What are the big things, I guess for you, Kelly, that jump out, that you would want to tackle first with regard to Jane and Tyra?

[00:09:07] KRH: Probably the first two is just like the taxable account, the cash position, like having a good understanding of what they have those in place for. Is it a future expense that’s very short term? Is it something more intermediate where we could do a little bit more with those resources? I do think for the wealth building, probably three of the investments are okay-ish, like the target date funds of 2030. I would want to just double check what’s in those funds, make sure they’re close to the right asset allocation, but the SEP IRA for retirement is a little bit more aggressive than it should be for their age, and I suspect the Vanguard target date 2060 potentially could be as well. That seems to make it seem like it’s for retirement, if it’s in the target date fund, but something that I would agree should be confirmed, for sure. But also, what Jane’s mother’s need is, I think, if some of the cash has been earmarked towards helping with some of her care, that would make a difference in kind of the recommendations for how to best put it to work, short term, midterm or long term.

[00:10:27] TB: My thoughts on the on the estate plan documents. I definitely would run out would want to run those to ground. We had some content about a book about how your parent’s estate planning or lack thereof can really affect your own financial plan. “Mom and Dad, we need to talk.” We can link that into the show notes. But I think that’s a vulnerability, and we want to make sure that that’s lined up. So, we’re not having to sue for conservative ship or do things that, if those documents are in place, are really going to put us in a bind later on.

From an asset allocation perspective, Christina, how would you broach this subject? Because obviously, there’s, Kelly’s point, digging in to fidelity 2030 target date fund, Vanguard target, not all target date funds are created equal. We have one that 2030 is probably a little bit – we’re going to be a little bit more conservative than the S&P 500, or the 2060. So, what would be your process to kind of get them in the right model right now, three to five years from retirement, they’re probably going to want to be the most conservative that they ever want to be. Because if the market dips now, it’s very hard to uncover, and that’s where we have to start having conversations of potentially pushing retirement age back, which is not a fun conversation to have. So, from an asset allocation perspective, how would you tackle that with Jane and Tyra?

[00:11:46] CS: Sure. So, first thing I’d want to look at is taking a deeper dive, like what exactly is built into these target date funds? How are they allocated? Mostly looking at the ratio of equities to bonds. So, someone who’s about three to five years out, they can be a little risky, but we want to see more of the bond exposure. Things starting to dial back, their savings years, so maybe looking more at a 60% equity, 60% to 70%, equity 30% to 40% bond allocation for them. And yeah, and then revisiting the S&P 500, for sure, since that is definitely a lot more aggressive than we would want them to be invested at the moment.

Also, another thing to consider too, Tim is we got to get people thinking too, what does my cash needs? What are those going to look like, as I’m getting closer to retirement? So, yeah, we might have some money earmarked that we could be investing, but we still need to have money set aside for emergency fund. Maybe, as you get closer to the retirement date, like have at least a year or so of cash saved up, that is one thing that we’re considering keeping it in a money market, or high yield savings type of environment as well.

[00:13:06] TB: Yeah, for sure. I mean, I think really looking at our processes to really look at the investments by approaching the client with a risk tolerance and seeing what comes out there. And then kind of comparing that to what we think their risk capacity is. So, risk capacity being like, what is the risk that they should be taking? The risk tolerances, what is the risk that they want to take? And they should be taken to your point, Christine, a lot less risk, because we want to really protect that principle. We don’t want to lose anything, and potentially have to push back the retirement or do something different because of where the markets are going.

So, I think foundationally, making sure that that’s there is going to be really important. And to Kelly, your point, 143,000 in cash money savings is a good chunk of change. Christina, you mentioned like, you didn’t say the bad word, but the bad word would be like, what is the budget had been through retirement, which is going to shape the emergency fund. It’s going to shape a lot of things, what’s the retirement paycheck going to look like? The clarifying questions I would want to have is like, what is that 143,000? Is that to pay Thomas’s tuition next year? Do we run that money through the 529? I don’t see a 529 on the balance sheet. But the benefit that PA residents get from a state tax deduction is pretty generous. I think it’s 16,000 per beneficiary, 30,000, 32,000 per filing jointly.

So, if you can shelter some of that, that would be great. But what is the savings account for? What’s the taxable account for? Is the taxable account, is that earmarked for retirement? They’re in a position right now where I’m assuming Jane, if she’s not beyond 59 and a half, she will be sued. So, all of these 401(k)s, Roth IRAs, SEPs, like they can be accessed and used for whatever purpose so we can use some of that money for things that are other than retirement, but I would just want to clarify, what’s the savings account for, what’s the taxable account for, et cetera, before we kind of get into how to deploy these accounts, and again, making sure that, we need an emergency fund, let’s not invest it in a risky way. But we want to get that yield. I think, high yield savings accounts are now at 3%. You can get CEs at 4%. Even the eye bond is still attractive. I think it’s 6.8% plus a fixed rate at point 4%. So, there’s some liquidity issues there. But that might be a good place to park some dollars. You can put up to $10,000 a year there.

So, Kelly, if they’re asking, are we on track for retirement? How do we best answer that question? I’m a visual learner. So, are there things that we can show the client to kind of model that out a bit? What’s that look like on your end?

[00:15:50] KRH: I think these are very, very good questions that we do get from clients. And we ask clients to work on uploading and linking documents to eMoney. So, it’s a software tool that we use, that can be very helpful and looking at where things are at. Even to answer the question about the 529, they’re not listed on their spreadsheet. But they do have –

[00:16:17] TB: Oh, they do have. Okay, good.

[00:16:19] KRH: – do have them. And actually, they don’t pull across on a balance sheet either. So even when we’re working with eMoney, because they’re technically assets for the beneficiary. So, there are the two 529s in place. And you’re right, that Pennsylvania is quite 529 friendly with the rules. But when we get that question, like, good, not good, like we do a nest egg calculation, but then we can also go in the eMoney and look at goals, just to see overall. I’m going to pick one of the scenarios that they were kind of asking about the retire early. The baseline facts is like, based on now how things look towards retirement, and they originally had an age 65.

So, we’ve got the 65 in here, this 95% would suggest like, looks pretty good for being able to retire at that age. We have a couple expenses embedded in. We’ve got college costs, but we can add in college, I mean, we could probably spend the whole rest of the day and Thanksgiving, turkey dinner, talking about things we can do in eMoney. But just to give a high-level overview, we can enter education as like only the 529s cover that expense or do they want to pay out a cash flow a certain amount to help with that goal. We can enter specific school, so they wanted to see public school, public state school, and they wanted to see a private school just to have a comparable.

So, we’ve added in both of those. From here, I like to look at some cash flow reports, so this gives you a like, this looks reasonable and doable. Even the retire early like looks pretty reasonable, but then it is good to see the layers just to make sure things are input pretty well to reflect what the client wants to accomplish. Do the expenses. Tim, you’re right, spot on, are the expenses accurate for what the client is looking to do? So, we entered in living expenses, their liabilities, going to be the mortgage. They have some other expenses added in so they have car purchases every couple years. This is the 529 expense coming across.

So yeah, we do like to take the information that the client provides. Our data is only as good as what accounts are linked. But then we can go back in and run some of those scenarios too. Can they buy the lake cabin? Now, it’s entered as an additional property, not instead of their primary residence. This is less successful. We do like to see above 80%. I guess, I probably on the conservative side like to see 85 to 90. I think when Christina and I look at scenarios, because there’s things that can happen in between that really do impact. Like this really does not include Jane’s mom. Does a certain amount need to be embedded to help Jane’s mom and what is that amount per year? But we can add that? Is it an extra $1,000 a month for her care? Is it 500? Is it something different? But those are important combo situations like what do Jane and Tyra collaboratively think they can do? The conversation is really important with both of them. They have to be on the same page about what they’re willing and able to do and maybe make tradeoffs about to help in that scenario.

[00:20:19] TB: Yeah. So, for those of you that are listening to this, maybe in the car, don’t necessarily see the visual, if you’re not watching us on YouTube, on our channel, what Kelly is really presenting here is an illustration of what ifs. If we buy a lake house to retire early, what is the probability of success, if we have to use these monies for different goals that we have? Are we still going to have money at the end of our plan?

So, what the tool does is that it uses simulation, it uses 1,000 randomly generated market returns and volatility, called trial rounds to say, okay, 95% or 950 times out of 1,000, there’s going to be money leftover of the plan, and anything above the threshold of 80% or 82%, is good. And typically, if it’s lower, we’re going to adjust the plan as we go to make sure that there is money left over. So, the idea is to keep, there is money, between now and then when you when you pass away.

So, the nice part about this is it allows us to kind of toggle on and off different scenarios, to see how it affects the overall nest egg, so to speak, and provide some math behind it. So, the nice part about this is that, you can kind of talk to the client, and you can talk to Jane, you can talk to Tyra and you say, of all these different things that we’ve extracted from your goals, whether it’s a cabin, or being able to take care of your mom, or retire at this age versus this age, what’s the most important? And then basically turn those on and off to see, okay, once we get to this threshold, then the plan might be in jeopardy and we can adjust from there.

But I think this is great, and a visual perspective, and this is the way I learned. I think, like from a client impact, I think, this is huge. Yeah, this is great modeling Kelly. Christina, when you look at this particular client, at least from some of the models that we’re seeing, are there things that you would want some additional information, whether it is Jane’s mom, or maybe more additional information on what is the goal for the education planning? Is it the put the boys through four years of school? Is there a certain percentage? Are we using some of that? Are we counting on scholarships? Are we counting on debt? What are some of the approaches that you would take with the client to kind of refine this out a bit?

[00:22:39] CS: Yeah. So again, just digging more into the weeds. And to your point with the education. Yes, are they going to be relying strictly on loans? Or are there scholarships involved? Or is it a combination of all three? Are they going to be funding, maybe a third of it, from their cash flow? Some from the 529, others from scholarships?

So, we’d like to see some diversity, so to speak, when it comes to funding college needs, especially if 529 is not going to carry the weight. And then looking at savings and withdrawals for the education expenses, as is it does look like there is going to be a shortfall. So, having more of those conversations, again, what is the 143,000 saved for? Is part of that going to help Thomas and Robert. But then again, looking back at what they had given us with the 529, how is it invested? Kelly, when you had shown us that it looked like it was probably just in the money market at the moment, and I would be more curious to see, well, A, is it linking properly. But B, is it indeed invested? You have to have a good solid allocation in there, if you want that money to work for you, over the period of time they have left.

[00:23:53] TB: And probably a good chunk of that money for Thomas, who’s the 17-year-old should be for a money market. It’s almost like you were saying like you want, maybe, like a year’s worth of cash for retirement. That might be true for the first year or so for tuition. But then the balance of that should be invested. I think Thomas had 45,000. So, a good chunk of that should be either in a balanced fund or something like that. For Robert, who is 14, and he saw us four years until the first year, we probably can be a little bit more aggressive. And then, as we get closer, same thing with retirement, we’re having more of a bond allocation, less of an equity allocation. The money mark is going to do well today just because of inflation, but you’re also being killed by that purchasing power that’s kind of being eroded every year.

So, what Kelly is showing right now on the screen is kind of the shortfall, the projected shortfall for the education expenses and it basically showing us what percent is underfunded, which is not necessarily a bad thing. We kind of talked about the rule of 33% and where we want, if we’re saving for a kid, a kid’s college, and we don’t really know what our goal is, it might be okay, we’re going to try to get x amount into a 529, pay x amount from , in that year, that’s the salary in that year for college. And then maybe the last third comes from scholarships, student loans, et cetera.

So, this is kind of showing us what has been underfunded so we can kind of plan for that and know what to do, so great stuff. Kelly, can you shift back to the case study real quick, I want to have a discussion that we really haven’t had much discussion on. We talked about Social Security in the past, I think, again, pulling their statements is going to be really important to see where they’re at. But I really want to talk a little bit more about the long-term care, and then Medicare decisions. So, walk me through, how would we approach those? Obviously, these are two things that, I think, there’s a lot of kind of negative press around long-term care insurance. It shouldn’t be something that we sell fund. What is long term care insurance? Why do I need it? So, I guess, let’s start there, how would we approach this particular risk that Jane and Tyra have to their financial plan?

[00:26:12] KRH: I will admit, it is a little bit newer territory for us, like typically, with our client base, we’re not having a ton of conversations about an immediate need. So, we have done some work recently, just to be better educated and to kind of get up to speed on some of the products. So recently, talking through kind of two products. One is a pretty traditional, like, pay a premium, get a policy, and it covers a certain amount of care per day, calculated out on an annual basis. And one of the biggest issues with those policies is like premium goes up. We had some education that I found to be very concerning, and enlightening, just so we know the premiums can go up. But with state regulations, there’s not a ton of regulation on how much the premiums can go up. So, that’s one of the challenges is like, if you buy a policy, you have it for like 10 years, your age 75, and the premium goes up and it becomes unaffordable. Pay 10 years into it, but you have to stop, that’s a concern.

So then, there’s a hybrid product that has some insight into that premium piece, but also provides a death benefit. Because the other concern is you never need the long-term care. You’ve paid for this premium, you have, unfortunately, a death event, without any care happening, and all that money has not been allocated anywhere else. So, there are some things out there. I think that’s kind of one of the things we’ve been working through, is understanding those policies, and then write the comparable, like many insurance products, is like if you paid for it out of pocket and funded it yourself. So, kind of running some scenarios like, that’s one of the things we started to build out, and that eMoney scenario was, if you take the premium and put it away, like how much could that grow? Because it seems like the premium, happy medium timeframe is like age 60 to 65 to start a premium then.

But again, a lot of things that we are learning about too, because there’s been a lot of movement. I think there used to be the person that was talking with us about it, like thousands of long-term care providers, like insurance providers, and it’s down to a very small quantity now, so a lot has changed.

[00:28:46] TB: Yeah, when I was first getting into the industry, it was that and it was tons of providers, premiums going up. I think the industry didn’t have enough information, because this is kind of a newer product, and some of these policies were priced, not correctly. They were – I think it was like low interest rate environment, which makes it makes it tough for them. People are living longer, or they’re alive longer with conditions that pay out a policy, because our medicine is better. I think though that, we’ve kind of gone through the burst of the bubble. I think a lot more of these policies have stabilized. I think you can still see increases I think the hybrid model is good in a sense that there are – it’s guaranteed, so your premium is fixed. Whereas, that’s not necessary for long term.

To back up, for those that are thinking like what are we talking about, long-term care, really what it is, it’s a broad range of skilled custodial and other types of care that’s provided over an extended period of time, due to things like chronic illness, physical disability or some cognitive of impairment. And the scary number of this is like roughly 60% of Americans are going to need some type of like long-term care in their life, and I think that number is continuing to go up. So, this is where, I think, a lot of people think of like nursing home, and that’s not we’re really talking about. I think the idea behind aging in place and keeping you in the home, as long as possible. 

So, if you are getting older, and you’re starting to have problems bathing or dressing or with personal hygiene or eating, you would have someone come in and help and aide. For a lot of people, it’s a family member, or it’s a spouse, which can take a toll on their own mental, physical and financial health. I think, my perspective on this is evolving, but I think that studies have shown that couples, when they look at this type of care, are willing to spend, on average, in the range of $2,500 to $3,000 per year to get some type of policy, and you can get pretty decent coverage by doing that. I think it’s establishing a baseline at least to cover like home care. So, to have somebody come into the house and 80% of care that is provided through these policies, is homecare.

I think conversation, is what really what we need with Jane and Tyra. I think it’s to kind of demystify it a little bit, maybe not make it as scary as I’ve been led to believe or has seen. Because this is a major risk, like if you can – this can be a major drain on the financial plan if you don’t have that large reserve of cash or investments, or a policy in place. So, I think it’s important to kind of get in front of it, and just have a have a good conversation and at least have a baseline policy for homecare, I think would be a good starting point. And then see like, what are the social like, is Thomas, is Robert, are they going to be a safety net? Or my dad always says, “Just put me on the ice float and give me the Eskimo retirement.” That’s kind of what he’s looking for.

But I think, some of the social networks that you have, in terms of talking through this is going to be important as well.

Christina, how about Medicare? What’s your take on this? Obviously, they’re a couple years away from enrolling in Medicare. But how do you approach this with Jane and Tyra in terms of how that works?

[00:32:21] CS: Yeah, so I think it’s just giving them a high-level approach to what to expect like a year in advance. So, when you reach age 65, the window opens up three months before their 65th birthday, and they have until three months after their 65th birthday. So, in essence, is a seven-month period. You can go in, enroll your Part A, Part B, if necessary. Most of times, it will be, because if you’re retiring, you’re going to be off of your employer’s medical plan, and you may not have to worry about correlating benefits at that point. So, it’s really not that scary. And then, on an annual basis, once they are involved with Medicare, there’s ways you can change up your plan or your drug plan as you need to, and there are resources and people to help you with that.

[00:33:12] TB: Yeah, the enrollment period is going to be super important, right? It’s typically three months before you’re 65, and then three months after you turn 65, so it’s like a seven-month enrollment period for initial. You want to do that so you’re not penalized later, that can happen, so you don’t want to blow through that enrollment period. I think that you get a ton of mailers for that to remind you.

But I think the big decision from there is like do I do Original Medicare A and B? Or do I do a Medicare Advantage plan which is a kind of more like private insurance HMO that Medicare reimburses for on a per participant basis? There’s I think, hundreds of plan Ds, which is the prescription. Do you get a Medigap policy with Original Medicare? There are so many things that go into this. And that’s going to go into like, what’s your view on, do you want convenience? Most providers will accept Medicare insurance, but it’s not necessarily as simple as maybe like a Medicare Advantage. If you’re going to be a snowbird, like if they decide, “Hey, we’re going to buy this cabin, but we also want to buy a place in Florida.” Having care coordinated between those two, if you’re in a Medicare Advantage is more like an HMO. So, if you’re out of network, that can be problematic.

There’s lots of different things that go into this. At the end of the day, this is probably one of the bigger concerns, I think, that people have is like, what does this look like? If there is a gap, if they decide to retire before age 65, what do they do? Is that something like Cobra? Does the employer offer anything that’s becoming more and more of a dinosaur feature of late? The other thing that we didn’t mention that, Christina, we were talking about off mic was like, even long-term care insurance, I think we’re seeing that show up on an employer benefit. So, really taking a look at that and what’s provided there. The big things with long-term care, just to circle back to that is like, when we’re looking at this, what is the monthly benefit that we’re targeting? If we are trying to cover home care, you can – Christina was telling me about this awesome calculator that you can find at your state, this is what it costs. So, it’s 5,000, it’s 6,000, like, we’re going to target that. What’s your deductible period? So, that’s the elimination period or the time you have to wait before you have benefits. So, a lot. It’s just like disability insurance, a lot of them are built as 90 days. How long is the benefit going to pay out? And then like, do you want an inflation rider?

So, to circle back on those things, those are the conversations we’re going to having concert of like, what do we do with Medicare? If there is a gap in Medicare, what do we do, et cetera? But I think Kelly, the only other thing that we probably should discuss briefly, that the client brought up, I think this is the one thing that I have outstanding here is the debt. So, one, is should they be concerned about the amount of mortgage debt? Should they use some of that cash set savings for the car note and pay it off? Obviously, interest rates have moved a lot, over the last year or two. So, what would be your answer to that question? Obviously, we probably need some more context with what’s going on in different parts of the plan. But how would you approach that with them?

[00:36:07] CS: Right, so it is interesting, like, I think just baseline, high level, the mortgage, usually, it’s more desirable to not have a mortgage in retirement to have the cash flow be less. But I am intrigued by like, this is not the forever home. It’d be nice to know, well, like how long? When would the transition take place to either a smaller home or to that cabin? We see a lot of people talk about being expats too, which is kind of interesting, depending on what happens with Jane’s mom and the kids in college, is that on the radar as well? 

So, like the mortgage, I feel like normally would be a priority to not have on the table. But in this case, I don’t have as much of a concern about it, if there is a potential for a transition that we can talk through, to see what is affordable. Is the 2858, is that affordable in retirement with the rest of the expenses? The cars, I would say that interest rates are lower, which is good. I wonder if maybe the kiddos would like to contribute and pay off if they’re going to eventually take ownership of the car. I feel like having the kids have some type of responsibility, some piece of the puzzle that they have to take care of, whether it’s paying part of their car insurance, definitely upkeep, maintenance gas. I personally think it’s an important piece for them to feel some type of responsibility. So, I guess I’d be curious as to their student jobs and the college, and can they help take care of the one vehicle. I guess, I’d be inclined to maybe pay off the other depending on what the other goals with the cash flow is.

[00:38:03] TB: Yeah, mathematically, I wouldn’t be in a rush to pay off the notes if you can get 3% in a high yield and both these notes are 1.92, 2.25, doesn’t necessarily make sense. But some of that is just kind of peace of mind to clear the balance sheet on the liability side. But the mortgage is I think the bigger one, the bigger shoe that we’d have to figure out, like how it’s going to drop because there’s some equity in the primary home, what it’s valued at, versus the mortgage. My big thing is if they buy the cabin, they would have essentially two mortgages, that if they sold the primary house, they could pay off the original mortgage and maybe apply some of that back to the cabin. It’s just a matter of like, what’s their comfort level in terms of carrying a mortgage debt into their 70s, 80s, et cetera.

So, there’s nothing concerning about, I think they’re on a fixed rate for the mortgage, so it’s not like it’s a variable rate or an arm or anything they have to worry about, but it’s just kind of the comfort level and then how is that, to your point, that 2858 go into play on a fixed income when we’re talking about generating a paycheck from Social Security, from the retirement assets and maybe any part time work or whatever they’re doing, so that would be the main concern.

What did I miss guys? I feel like we covered a lot of ground here. This was great. This is a great case study. Did we did we miss any question?

[00:39:30] CS: FAFSA, Tim, which is –

[00:39:31] TB: Oh, yeah.

[00:39:33] CS: I mean, it’s mostly income in the formula and probably like that cash might be a little bit of – if you’re planning to use it for college expenses, like running it through the 529. Yeah, I guess if they retired, there’s the two-year look back period. So, at least Thomas would be pretty well through school. I think by the time, if they retired, but they might have an impact on Robert’s last year or last two years. But we get questions about maximizing the FAFSA and again, with the income being the biggest component, we don’t know what the kids’ assets are, those aren’t entered in the eMoney, usually don’t ask about those. But I guess I’d inquire about those too, make sure if they have an UGMA and UTMA that they spend those down first before the 529s, since they count different in the formula.

[00:40:34] TB: I think one of the things that I would say is I think some sometimes people are, because of the formula, they detract it from putting money into the 529. But I think, having that pot of money there that’s grown tax free, if it’s used for education expenses, is more valuable than I think not doing it because you think that the FAFSA equation is going to change.

So, just like, what we talked about, sometimes people do weird things that are out of character because they’re trying to like save on taxes. If going to college is a big part of the plan for your kiddos, the 529 is going to be one of the best – it’s depending on your state, but it’s going to be one of the better vehicles to do that and I wouldn’t let the FAFSA formula detract anybody from doing that. But I think, yeah, probably looking at some of those assets. I know you can also put assets in. I think grandparents’ name, and I think that doesn’t necessarily capture in the equation. So, definitely something that we want to look at as we’re tackling the other parts of the financial plan, so good stuff guys. I appreciate the chat here. I think very, very productive. And yeah, just look forward to doing more of these in the future and thanks for lending your opinion and how this client is shaping out. So, enjoy the holiday.

[00:41:55] KRH: Thank you.

[00:41:56] CS: You too. Thanks.

[00:41:57] TB: All right, take care.

[OUTRO]

[00:41:58] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and it is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. 

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog post and podcast is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analysis expressed herein are solely those of Your Financial Pharmacist unless otherwise noted and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward looking statements, which are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. 

Thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 283: How to Optimize Your Tax Situation with Sean Richards, CPA


YFP Director of Tax, Sean Richards, CPA, EA, talks about how to optimize your tax situation as a pharmacist. He discusses tax basics that every pharmacist should know, the critical distinction between tax planning and tax preparation, and how to prepare for the year-end to put yourself in the position to have a headache-free tax season. 

About Today’s Guest

Sean Richards, CPA, EA, received his undergraduate degree in Corporate Finance and Accounting, as well as his Master of Accountancy, from Bentley University in Waltham, MA. Sean has been a Certified Public Accountant (CPA) since 2015 and received his Enrolled Agent certification earlier this year. Prior to joining the YFP team, Sean was the Senior Treasury Manager at PRA Group, a global debt buyer based in Norfolk, VA. He began his career at American Tower Corporation where, over 10 years, he held several positions in audit, treasury, and accounting. As the Director of YFP Tax, Sean focuses on broadening the company’s existing tax planning and preparation operations, as well as developing and launching new accounting offerings, including bookkeeping, payroll, and fractional CFO services.

Episode Summary

This week on the YFP Podcast, YFP Co-Founder & CEO, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, welcomes YFP’s Director of Tax, Sean Richards, CPA, to the show to discuss optimizing your tax situation as a pharmacist. During the show, they cover areas for optimization, including tax basics that every pharmacist should know regardless of their income or stage of career. The discussion covers basic tax terminology, the federal income tax formula, and why we don’t have a better understanding of tax fundamentals in general. Sean explains AGI (Adjusted Gross Income), how to calculate AGI, an overview of deductions and credits, and how they differ in their impact on your tax picture. Sean takes a moment to explain the difference between marginal and effective tax rates, how bunching charitable donations can impact tax optimization and the triple tax benefits that exist with HSA Accounts. Sean details the distinction between tax planning and tax preparation with a comparison that listeners will enjoy. The discussion leads to common tax strategies that many pharmacists currently employ to optimize their financial situation and things to look out for to avoid common mishaps and mistakes with tax. Sean answers a question on the Inflation Reduction act, providing examples of tax benefits that listeners might take advantage of, and closes out the episode with ways to prepare for the year’s end and put yourself in a position to have a headache-free tax season. 

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRO]

[00:00:00] TU: Hey, everybody. Tim Ulbrich here, and thank you for listening to the YFP Podcast, where each week we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. 

This week, I had the pleasure of welcoming YFP Director of Tax, Sean Richards, onto the show to talk about how to optimize your tax situation as a pharmacist. During the show, we discuss tax basics that every pharmacist should know, regardless of income or stage of career, the important distinction between tax planning and tax preparation, some common tax strategies that pharmacists are employing to optimize their financial situation, things to be on the lookout for where there’s common mishaps and mistakes, and finally how to prepare for the year end to put yourself in the position to have a headache-free tax season. 

Now, at YFP, we know that filing your taxes and figuring out how to optimize your tax situation can be stressful and overwhelming, and that’s why YFP Tax is opening up its tax planning services to more pharmacist households this year. Unlike other firms, YFP Tax isn’t focused on just completing your return. Rather they provide value care and attention to you and your taxes. Because they work specifically with pharmacists, they are familiar with aspects of your financial plan that have an impact on your taxes like student loans, benefit packages, side hustles, and more. You can visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/tax to learn more and to join the waitlist for the 2022 filing season. Again, that’s yourfinancialpharmacist.com/tax. 

[INTERVIEW]

[00:01:29] TU: Sean, welcome to the show.

[00:01:30] SR: Thanks for having me. I’m glad to be here.

[00:01:33] TU: Excited to have you officially part of the YFP team, leading our tax team and efforts. I know some folks listening may not be aware of who is Sean and what is he doing, as it relates to the YFP team. So give us a brief intro to, Sean, some your background and the work that you’re doing with YFP Tax.

[00:01:52] SR: Sure, yeah. So I mean, I wouldn’t be surprised that people haven’t seen my face yet. But it’s crazy because I’ve only been here for about three months, and I feel like I’ve met so many people and done so many things. It’s been awesome. But, yeah, I’m Sean Richards. So I’m the Director of Tax at YFP Tax, CPA, EA, my most recent certification there. So for those who don’t know, EA is an enrolled agent. It’s the IRS certification. It kind of gives you a leg up with talking to the IRS. 

Like I said, I’ve only been with the YFP team for a few months now. I worked at a large corporate for a while. They’re doing audit, accounting, treasury, a couple of different functions there. I briefly had another job before this. But, yeah, now I’m leading the YFP Tax team. So we have some tax offerings that we focus on, sort of more direct to consumer, where we’re doing prep tax planning, some of the things we’ll be talking about during this call. 

Then we also have a completely different sort of bookkeeping, payroll, all the way up to fractional CFO services, if you’re doing more of the side business or small business type thing. So, yeah, I’m really excited to be here and be part of the team.

[00:02:55] TU: Yeah. We also are excited, grateful to have you on board. It’s been fun to see the momentum of the work that you’ve been doing in just a couple months. It feels longer than that and that’s –

[00:03:05] SR: I said the same thing but in a good way, not a bad way. It feels longer but because it’s been a lot of good fulfilling work, not in a bad way.

[00:03:12] TU: You’re going to be hearing a lot more from Sean on the podcast and webinars, probably on the blog as well. As we’ve talked about on the show many times, tax is such an important part of the financial plan, one of the reasons that we’ve brought these services in house, so we can make sure that the financial plan is humming with the tax plan. Because of that, we’re going to be focusing on even more content than we have done in the past, as it relates to tax strategy and tax planning. 

The theme of this show today is really how to optimize as a pharmacist your tax situation. Our hope is whether you’re just getting started as a new practitioner, whether you’re mid-career, whether you’re further along in your career, maybe retirements on the rise in that. Regardless, you’ll be able to take one or two things away that you can apply to your situation, right? Whether we like it or not, taxes ain’t going away, right? It’s not like student loans where we pay them off and they’re gone. This is something we need to be thinking about throughout our career and how we can optimize. As Tim Baker says, we want to pay our fair share but no more. So we’re going to talk about how we can best optimize our tax situation. 

The first thing, Sean, is really understanding the tax basics. We’re going to talk about some specific formulas and terms that we need to make sure we understand, so we can appropriately prioritize that as a part of the plan. But first off, why are most of us, myself included, deficient in our basic tax understanding, right? We should all, I feel like, have a more foundational understanding, especially since we’ve got to pay these every year. Why don’t we have that?

[00:04:45] SR: Well, we could probably have a completely separate hour-long conversation about lobbying and all sorts of things from that standpoint. But, I mean, I think it really comes down to, I mean, I’m a product of the public school system, and I didn’t learn about taxes in school. I feel like it’s something where it’s just some schools might offer basic finance classes and how to open up a credit card or something. 

But taxes is something that doesn’t really come up. It’s one of those things that you just sort of join the workforce, and all of a sudden it’s expected that you’ll know what to do. Or you’ll have a guy or your dad or somebody will have a guy who can do it for you. But, I mean, I went to a business school, and it wasn’t even until my third year or so that I even took a tax class, where you kind of get into some of this stuff. 

So it really is something that isn’t fundamental as part of the education system here. As unfortunate as that may be, that’s why I’m hoping that I can kind of give some background to folks, so they’re not completely lost when it comes to the end of the year.

[00:05:35] TU: Yeah. I don’t think it’s a super exciting topic. Even in Econ 101, like we did some fun investing games and other things. I don’t remember learning about tax. Or maybe we did, and I just zoned out. But it certainly isn’t ever present in our educational system. I’m trying to teach my boys a little bit about taxes right now, and I’m having very little success. Hopefully, Sean, maybe they’ll hear your voice and listen a little bit closer. 

Let’s start with the federal income tax formula. How do we ultimately get to the final number of what we either owe or we receive back as a refund? Why is it so important that we understand this formula?

[00:06:12] SR: One of the reasons why it’s so important is that a lot of these terms get thrown around interchangeably, or they’re used as buzzwords. You’ll be hearing car commercials, and you hear kind of REITs and all these different things thrown out there. Everything’s sort of used interchangeably. So if you don’t really understand how the basic formula works, you might misinterpret something, or you might think that somebody’s talking about something that they’re not talking about. 

The basic formula is you have your income. You take out anything that’s tax-free, so things like municipal bond interest, something like that. Then you have your gross income, so not adjusted gross income, your gross income. Then we have what we call above the line deduction. So some of those would be like IRA contributions, things like that. Those are the what we call above the line because the magic line is what gets you to that AGI. 

Once you take out those above the line deductions, you get to what I just referred to, the magic number of AGI, which is an important one, and we’ll get to it in a little bit. But, I mean, that’s something where a lot of different phase outs and things kind of come into play. So that’s a really important number to have in the back of your mind.

[00:07:13] TU: Yeah. I think if folks, Sean, can really look at their tax returns, again not super exciting, right? But if you look at the 1040, if you start to understand some of these terms, and you can visualize like these above the line types of things, all of a sudden, the strategy pieces start falling into play, correct?

[00:07:30] SR: Yeah, exactly. A lot of people just have their tax return. They hand a box to their accountant. At the end of the year, he says you owe this much, or you’re getting this much in a refund. You say awesome, shake their hand, and you’re done. But all the things I’m talking about right now, I mean, your return could be 100 pages long. But if you look at that front page, you’ll be able to see these numbers that I’m talking about to at least give you a better understanding of how some of these things work. 

Once you have your AGI, then we get into deductions. I want to be careful here because this is one of those ones that gets very often thrown around interchangeably. So deductions, which can either be itemized or the standard deduction, depending on which one’s larger in your individual circumstance, are, what, take your AGI and get you down to the taxable income. That’s what actually ends up getting multiplied by your tax rate at the end of the day. So those are things to get you to your taxable income amount. 

Then you multiply by whatever your tax rate is. So there’s marginal rates and stuff, which I’m sure we’ll talk about in a little bit. But you take your taxable income, multiply it by your tax rate, and that gets you to what you theoretically will owe or what you’ll get back. Then we get into what we call credits. Those are, again, kind of used interchangeably or often confused with deductions. 

Credits dollar for dollar reduce what you owe at the end of the day. Whereas a deduction reduces your taxable income, you’re really only saving 30%, whatever your tax rate is on that deduction amount. So if someone says, “Oh, I’ll write it off,” you’re only really saving the times your tax rate portion of that. A credit is dollar for dollar. So if you’re able to take advantage of credits, you can really have a big impact on reducing what you owe at the end of the day.

[00:09:07] TU: Awesome. So you defined well deduction versus credit. Again, as folks are listening, pull up your tax return. Again, I think as you visualize this, it starts to come to life a little bit more. Let’s break down further AGI, and then I want to come back to marginal and effective tax rates, two terms that you threw around that are important that folks have a good understanding of. 

AGI, adjusted gross income, tell us more about that in detail. This comes up all the time, right? You saw this recently with some of the debt cancellation news. What’s your AGI? We talk about it as relates to different strategies with how we invest or how we save. What is AGI and why is it so important?

[00:09:43] SR: So AGI, again, is your gross income. So that would be your income less any of the non-taxable stuff like municipal bond, just like I mentioned. Less those above the line deductions. So that would be things like student loan interest deductions, contributions to the HSAs, traditional IRAs, things like that. That’s what gets you to that AGI. Why AGI is so important is because, like you just mentioned, a lot of different policies or different credits or things like that are based on that number. So they’ll say, “Hey, you’re eligible for this credit if you’re in this AGI range. Or if you exceed this AGI, you’re no longer eligible for this credit.” 

PSLF student loan relief is a big one. So they’ll say, “Hey, you’re eligible for this if your AGI is within this range or under this amount.” So that’s why it’s really important to have that number. Of all the numbers, that’s probably the most important one to have, just sort of handy when you’re looking at these different things.

[00:10:36] TU: How about your marginal versus effective tax rates? What’s the difference and, again, why is this important to understand?

[00:10:42] SR: So marginal is – When people say tax bracket, that’s usually what they mean. They mean marginal when they’re talking about that. So that’s where you’re sitting there, and you’re saying, “Oh, I’m in the 25% tax bracket. If I make another dollar, I’m going to be in the next tax bracket. I can’t make any more money. I’m going to owe more taxes.” So it doesn’t really work out that way because for each of these different brackets, you’re being taxed at the marginal rate for that particular bracket. If you average that out, that’s your effective rate at the end of the day. If you take what you actually owe in taxes versus what your income is and do a simple mathematical equation, you get your effective rates of what you truly are paying. 

Again, when you’re looking at your marginal rate in your bracket, that’s important for things like deduction. So if you say, “Hey, if I’m going to take this deduction,” if you want to do a quick calculation of what that would be for a dollar value for you, you multiply that by your marginal rate. But if you’re really thinking about it saying, “Oh, I don’t want to make any more money. It’s going to put me into the next bracket,” you got to really think about your effective rate when it comes to something like that.

[00:11:43] TU: Yeah. Usually, we want to be careful about not making more money because of taxes, right? So if we’re making more money and we’re paying taxes, that’s not necessarily a bad thing, right? We want to –

[00:11:52] SR: It’s a good thing. 

[00:11:53] TU: It’s a good thing. 

[00:11:54] SR: Some would argue that the more money you pay in taxes, the better that you’re actually doing at the end of the day, despite what anybody would say about trying to cheat the system or anything. You tax bill shows how healthy your finances are.

[00:12:06] TU: Yeah. [inaudible 00:12:07] and I wrote a book recently that he makes an argument that your number one KPI, key performance indicator, is the amount of taxes you pay to the IRS each year. I think the point is a good one, right? Obviously, you want to optimize and be as tax-efficient as possible. But if we’re able to earn more money, we’re paying more taxes. Again, that’s not a bad thing. That’s the first bucket here, understanding the tax basics. 

The second thing, Sean, is tax planning versus tax preparation. It’s something we have talked about on the show before but I think, honestly, something we can’t talk enough about because we confuse sometimes the filing versus the actual strategic look, as it relates to the tax planning and how we can optimize that as part of the plan. I’ve heard you presented this talk before and give a really cool example of a film director and a film editor, and how that helps highlight the difference between the two, tax planning and tax preparation. Tell us more.

[00:13:01] SR: Yeah. So it’s actually kind of what you were just saying, where you want to pay your fair share. The more you pay in tax at the end of the day, whatever your tax bill is, it kind of shows that you’re doing better, right? But at the same time, you don’t want to pay more than your fair share. You don’t want to pay more than you need, just because you’re not paying attention or for whatever reason. 

The way I like to think of it is tax planning is like a film director. So film director is watching the actors. They can affect change as they go. They have kind of an idea of what they want at the end of the day. If something goes wrong, they can say, “Ah, let’s take that back. Let’s change that.” Or, “I don’t like the way that that worked. I have this other vision in my head. Let’s do that.” Whereas a film editor, equally as important in the film production process, but they’re basically getting film that’s already been recorded. They’re saying, “All right, now work your magic and make this look good.” Of course, they can do a lot. They’re professionals. They can tweak it. They can make it look beautiful. But they can’t go back and change what’s already happened in the past, right?

Even though it’s an important piece, that tax preparation piece is really only a historical look back. It’s not something where like the tax planning, the director side, you can actually make changes throughout the course of the year and have those kind of play into the final product. So that’s the way I like to look at it.

[00:14:13] TU: Yeah, especially if you think about the timeline of filing your taxes mid-April. We’re already a quarter-plus into the New Year. So even when we file – Even if at that point, we’re starting to think ahead and more strategically, we’re already beginning to put a dent in that year. So, yes, we’ve got to file, right? Or else the IRS can come knocking on our doors. But better yet, we’re doing some of the strategy, the look ahead, the planning as the year is going on, and we’re being more proactive than just the filing alone. Then we’re not only optimizing but, hopefully, also minimizing any surprises. 

[00:14:47] SR: Exactly, yeah. You don’t want surprises. You want to be able to take a look at things in the middle of the year and say, “Hey, where am I going to be come filing time? Or where am I even going to be a couple years from now down the line?”

[00:14:56] TU: I’ve seen you present on this before, where you give an example. Obviously, there’s many ways that tax planning can help optimize, but one example being around how one might bunch their charitable giving to help optimize how efficient that tax is in that given year. So talk to us a little bit further about that example. It’s just one of many examples of how someone might optimize your tax strategy.

[00:15:21] SR: That’s a perfect example to give right now because, like you just said, we’re getting towards the end of the year. So someone might say, “Well, if tax planning at this point isn’t really going to make much of a difference, maybe I’ll start next year or something.” But with something like bunching, that’s something that can be affected at the end of the year, up till the last day. So that’s something where if you’re looking at things and you’re saying, “Well, all right. I’m taking the center deduction this year, but I’m really close to being able to itemize my deductions.” So some people might just do what they’re normally going to do and just take whatever they get, whether it’s a standard deduction or itemized. 

But if you’re going to be donating to charity for an example, and you know that you want to give, say, $10,000 over the course of the next couple years, you could break that into 5,000 this year and 5,000 next year, whatever. But if you look at it and you say, “Hey. Well, what if I bring some of these charitable contributions into this year and maybe be able to take advantage of itemizing my deductions? And then in a future year maybe not give that money and take the standard deduction?” 

That’s something where you could make that donation on December 31st, and it’s effectively like given 5,000 on December 31st and given 5,000 on January 1st. But from a tax standpoint, it can make a really big impact. So that’s something where that tax planning, that directorial thing really comes into play, where if you look at those things and think about the impacts that will have down the line, even where you don’t change any of the facts and how much money you’re actually going to give, it can make a big difference.

[00:16:43] TU: That’s one tax strategy to employ a good example of where the tax planning can really be helpful the more strategic look ahead versus just the filing alone. Let’s shift into the third area here, which is common tax strategies to employ. Certainly not an exhaustive list, right? There’s many, many, many different strategies. It’s, of course, customized and individualized to one’s personal situation. But let’s talk about a few common ones that we see. Let’s start with the HAS, Sean. What is it? If folks are kind of new to that term, what are some of the tax benefits? Who qualifies, contribution limits? Give us the lowdown on the HSA.

[00:17:18] SR: HSA is great. That’s one where if I had a time machine, I’d go back and tell myself to get involved in those more. It’s something where I just didn’t really hear much about it. Or even if I did, it was something where I’d say, “Well, I’m young. I don’t have a lot of health expenses or anything. I’m not going to really worry about that.” But HSAs are great because they’re one of the few vehicles that have a triple tax benefit. So any of your contributions are going to be tax-free. The growth of those contributions will be tax free. Then when you actually go and make your distributions on it, those are tax-free. 

Basically, what it is, it’s sort of like an IRA, where you put money in, and you can take distributions on it. Until you get to retirement age, you can only use those distributions for medical expenses. But it’s something where, again, it’s just a different type of investment vehicle for you. So if you have medical expenses that you can use now, great. If not, well, maybe not great, but it’s a good way to use it. If not, then you let it grow. When you reach retirement age, you take it out. 

Anybody can contribute, as long as they’re enrolled in a high-deductible health plan. The limits are pretty similar to IRAs. I think in 2022, it’s 3,650 for individuals, and then double for married folks. There’s no limit based on how much you make. Well, there’s the limits that I just mentioned, but there’s no phase outs or anything like that. So if you make too much money, you don’t disqualify yourself, so definitely a great vehicle to take advantage of.

[00:18:41] TU: Yeah. Sean, we see this a lot with our community, I think, for good reasons. One being you just mentioned, right? So higher income professionals, especially if they have a joint household income, where they may be phased out of other opportunities, this is not one of them. Then depending on what they’re thinking of this, either use of short-term known healthcare expenses so that they can optimize and save a little bit on taxes or using it more in that long-term savings vehicle to also optimize the tax benefits. 

We’ve talked about this on the podcast before, but we’re going to keep talking about it because we still see a lot of pharmacists that aren’t taking advantage of this. Given that there’s more and more high-deductible health plans that are being offered that people are opting into because of the rising costs of health care expenses, I think we’re going to see this even more popular in the future than it is today. 

So Episode 165, we talked about the power of an HSA. We’ll link to that in the show notes. We also have a blog post, why I’m not using my HSA to pay for medical expenses. That talks more about the strategy side of using the HSA as a long-term investing vehicle. We’ll link to that blog post as well in the show notes. 

Next up, Sean, for common tax strategies is the IRA. Talk to us a little bit. We’ve covered this in detail on the show, but just traditional versus Roth and some of the strategy around the IRA side of things.

[00:19:57] SR: Yep. I won’t go too much into this because I’ve listened to the podcast before. I know it comes up often. But basically, the two differences here are your traditional IRA, your Roth IRA. So the traditional is something where your contributions you’re making now, you’re taking a tax deduction on it now. Then in the future, when you take it out, you’ll have to pay taxes on it. Roth is the opposite. So you do not get the deduction now. But then when you go to take the money out in the future, when you reach retirement age, it will be tax-free. 

With that, that one’s really one where you want to sit down with your financial planner or whoever is kind of coming up with the financial strategy and really determine where am I going to be in the future? What’s my tax bracket going to look like there versus what’s my tax bracket going to look like now? It gets into that whole planning versus preparation thing I was talking about before. So there’s a lot to unpack there. 

Like I said, similar as the HAS, so there’s a $6,000 limit. I think it goes up to 7,000 if you’re over 50. So you get a little bit of a catch up there if you’re older. But, yeah, no, just another one to take advantage of definitely. You should be making sure that with all of these, that you’re looking at what you’re – If your employer has any benefits and stuff and really try to take advantage of all these.

[00:21:01] TU: Yeah. Both of these HAS, IRA are great examples, where if the financial plan is humming with the tax plan, we can really start to think about this strategically, rather than we’re filing taxes here, and then we’re looking at the financial plan over there.

[00:21:14] SR: Yeah. It’s something that definitely should be married together. 

[00:21:16] TU: Third area, I want to talk about the common tax strategies and the Inflation Reduction Act. You and I are not here to debate whether or not the Inflation Reduction Act is actually going to reduce inflation. But rather, we’re here to talk about what are some of the opportunities and the credits that folks might be able to take advantage as a part of the Inflation Reduction Act. 

So hit us with the highlights of some of the things around the energy-efficient homes or Residential Clean Energy Credit and the Clean Vehicles Credit that folks may or may not already be aware of.

[00:21:44] SR: Yep. So I will try not to use too many of the different names for these because I know that they keep changing. So if I say it now, I’m sure by the time this airs, they’ll have some new fancy name for it. But basically, there’s three areas to highlight. So there’s sort of the more traditional home improvement type energy credit stuff. That’s things like installing new doors and windows on your house that are more energy-efficient, which is almost anything nowadays that’s coming out. But that’s something. 

So people might be familiar with the $500 lifetime credit. That’s where that used to kind of sit. Going forward, that’s going to be a $1,200 annual credit on your taxes. Remember, credits dollar for dollar reduce your taxes. So if you’re thinking – And this goes into effect next year, so something just to kind of keep in mind with planning ahead and everything. But if you’re thinking about getting some energy-efficient renovations done on your place, that’s definitely a big one to keep in mind. 

Even more on top of that, so if you’re not only thinking about, hey, let me get some new windows or something, but why don’t I throw some solar onto that or get some geothermal heating systems or anything, something like that going, so the Residential Clean Energy Credit, that recently bumped up to 30% of whatever your expenses are in that regard. Again, say you’re putting new solar panels outside. You can get a 30% tax credit on the cost to install that equipment, which is huge. 

Especially, again, if you’re planning ahead, you can maybe knock down some of your withholding. So if you know you’re going to have kind of a bigger tax bill at the end of the year, but you have this large project to offset, it’s something really to keep in mind there. Then the clean vehicles one, so there’s a lot to unpack there. I won’t get into too many of the details. But basically, they’ve expanded the credits available for buying electric vehicles or energy-efficient vehicles. 

The biggest one that I’d like to highlight there is going forward they’re actually going to start allowing a credit on previously-owned vehicles. So that’s something where in the past, you had to buy a new car, and I’m sure a lot of people want to buy a nice brand new Tesla but might not have been able to jump into that or afford it right away. So opening up that secondary market to be able to take advantage of the tax credits is going to be huge. 

There are some restrictions on that. If you’re buying a new car, definitely make sure there’s some restrictions around the car being assembled in North America and avoiding some of the mineral countries and stuff. So definitely go out and take a look. We can link to that in the show notes as well. The IRS has specific guidance on that, but those three are definitely some big areas to look forward to going forward.

[00:24:12] TU: Great stuff. I think there’s been a lot of news and potentially some confusion around that. So awesome, brief summary on what folks may be looking out for and how they can take advantage of those credits. The fourth area, as we continue this discussion on how to optimize your tax situation, is some things to be on the lookout for, perhaps some common mishaps or stumbling blocks along the way. 

The first one, Sean, may not apply to a huge percentage of our community listening, but we do have a handful of folks that work in the biopharmaceutical industry or in situations, where restricted stock units or employee stock purchase programs may be a thing, and so it’s worth talking a little bit further about. But what are some of the things that folks should be thinking about if RSUs or if ESPP does apply?

[00:25:00] SR: Yeah. So you’d be surprised. I mean, I’ve done some webinars and some speaking events. Even though it might only apply to a small percentage of people, the people who does apply to it really does kind of nail home because there’s a lot of, I don’t want to say, hidden tax confusion there. But it’s something where you’re excited you’re getting a bonus, you’re getting these restricted stock units, and you want to get in the market. People are all excited about Robinhood and everything. But you have to be careful because there might be some things that you might not be considering. 

With RSUs, you definitely want to make sure that when you’re selling your shares at the end of the day, when your shares vest, oftentimes you will actually recognize income when those shares vest. So taking a very, very quick step back, restricted stock units is usually something where a company will say, “Hey, we’re going to give you 40 shares, but it vests over a four-year period of 25% a year.” So when they vest, normally, you’ll recognize income on that. So what you want to make sure is that you’re not double counting that. When you’re going to sell those shares, make sure that that piece has been picked up already, and you’re not kind of picking it up again. 

Similarly, with employee stock purchase programs, ESPPs, another great thing to take advantage of if it exists for you, usually, what that is is a company, if you work for a publicly traded company, allowing you to buy into the company at a discount. What you want to keep in mind there is that oftentimes, when you buy it at that discount, that discounted price, say, it’s 15% of the market value, that will often come on your W2 as income as well. 

Again, it’s something else that you want to keep in mind. Make sure when you’re paying capital gains on that at the end of the day that you’re backing that piece out. They’ll often be what they call a supplemental form that comes with your 1099. So make sure that you look at that and adjust your basis or work with your accountant. I know I’m probably going over a lot of people’s heads, but make sure you find that piece of paper and give it to your accountant. So they know, hey, I need to adjust this basis and not pay additional on that income that you already were taxed for, right? You don’t want to pay twice in the same money. 

[00:26:55] TU: Yeah. This is something, Sean, we see, as you mentioned, a lot of interest and attention, especially from folks that may be doing fellowship programs or others, looking at job offers, trying to understand what do these terms mean, and then how do they strategize around them, of course, the tax considerations that you mentioned. 

The other area to talk about, as we continue discussing things to be on lookout for, cryptocurrency transactions. I know this was something that our tax team spent a lot of time on during the previous filing season. We saw rapid growth in folks that were investing in cryptocurrency, making transactions. Maybe that slowed up a little bit, just because of what’s been going on in the market. Maybe it hasn’t. But nonetheless, this is reaching more and more people out there that may be dabbling into cryptocurrency. 

So we’re not going to talk about the strategy around cryptocurrency but here specifically about some of the tax considerations. Tell us more.

[00:27:47] SR: Yeah. So the thing to keep in mind with crypto is that – And I just talked about ESPP and RSUs, and that might, to some people, sound complicated. You get into capital gains and all that stuff. Cryptocurrency, the IRS considers that to be property, just like stocks. So if you’re going to the store and you’re buying a coffee with cryptocurrency, you’re effectively, at least to the IRS, going and selling like a share, right? Then buying your coffee. So every time you do that, there’s capital gains or losses associated with it, every single transaction. 

It’s something to keep in mind. I mean, I’m not discouraging anybody or giving anybody advice on whether to use it to buy a coffee or not. But something to keep in mind at the end of the year, you’re going to have to report on each one of those transactions. Some of the crypto software out there doesn’t readily print out that stuff for you, so you might have to use a third party to do it. 

The other thing to keep in mind is that NFTs are another kind of hot topic. I know that IRS has recently – I actually think that the 1040 this year, right on the front page, is going to have a little checkbox like they did last year with crypto saying, “Hey, did you buy or dispose of any digital assets?” So something else to keep in mind, NFTs are a hot topic, but it’s something that you actually have to record all those transactions. If you had a gain, you have to pay taxes on them.

[00:29:00] TU: Yeah. I wonder if anyone at the IRS 5 years ago, 10 years ago would have predicted having questions front and center on the 1040 about cryptocurrency and NFTs. But here we are, right? So obviously, there’s a lot more attention for good reasons that’s been given to those transactions, and I would say our tax team learned a lot through the tax season last year on this, just working with clients and kind of working through some of these issues. So if cryptocurrency transactions were something that was a part of your planning, something that we may be able to assist with. 

[00:29:30] SR: Yeah, absolutely. 

[00:29:31] TU: Sean, the last thing I want to talk about here on things to be on the lookout for is something we commonly see, which is paying the right amount of tax throughout the year. Especially important for those that maybe have significant changes in income, changes in dependents, maybe for those that are earning additional income, side hustle, business. Really, what we’re talking about here is whether or not we need to adjust withholdings or set aside some money for tax throughout the year, if that’s not being taken out of our paychecks. So what are some of those considerations around estimating and being able to estimate our taxes due throughout the year, so we’re not surprised come the filing season?

[00:30:08] SR: Yeah. So this goes back to what I was saying before, where you really want to keep the whole tax planning throughout the course of the year in mind. You don’t want to commit to at the end of the year and have a large bill or have even a large refund at the end of the day. I mean, it’s always nice getting cash back. But at the end of the day, it’s an interest-free loan that you’ve given to the government. So you want to avoid that. 

One of the things you want to do, like I said, is sort of project it out and see what you’re going to owe at the end of the day and decide whether you need to withhold any additional interchanger withholdings or make estimated payments. So one thing you can do, it’s called the safe harbor. So if you look at last year’s return and look at what you actually owed at the end of the day – Sorry, not actually owed at the end of the day in taxes but what your tax bill was. Your tax liability, I should say. 

So whether you had a refund or not, what your tax liability actually was, if you multiply that by 1.1, so 110% of that, and you make sure that whether you’re making payments to the IRS or just having regular withholdings from your W – For your regular paycheck. If you get that money into the IRS by the end of the year, you will avoid having to pay any additional penalties. Now, you might actually owe tax at the end of the day, but you won’t have any penalties. We call that the safe harbor amount saying, “Hey, that’s what I owed last year. 110% of that, we’re good to go.” 

One thing – So if you have a side gig and you’re not having money taken out of your paycheck is you might have to actually make estimated taxes. So there’s a schedule on that. It’s a quarterly schedule. But it’s something – Again, you want to take a look at your calculation and say, “Hey, if money is not being taken out my paycheck, I need to put this money aside and actually send it into the IRS on a regular basis.” 

So the way I like to look at it is think of your friend who’s the most financially irresponsible. If they didn’t have money taken out of their paycheck at the end of the day, would they be able to cover it at the end of the year? Probably not. So something you want to keep in mind.

[00:31:59] TU: Yeah. This is another reason. I think when you’re working with someone effectively throughout the year and planning and being more strategic, someone can help you with estimating what these payments will be. Obviously, especially for those that are earning additional income, side hustle, business, whatever, we want to make sure we’re doing that, and we’re looking at the overall financials of the business and accounting for the taxes that we’re going to owe. 

Sean, as we wrap up here with our fifth and final point, preparing for the year end, great timing as we’re getting ready to turn the calendar into December. Hopefully, it’s the time of year we’re starting to think about our taxes more intentionally. Hopefully, if we’ve done our job here, people are going to be thinking about this all the way throughout the year. So what are some of the year-end things that folks should be thinking about to ensure that they can minimize the stress and headaches that may otherwise come during the tax filing season?

[00:32:49] SR: Yeah. So it’s a lot of the things that I talked about before, right? Especially what I even just ended at, you want to look at your income, your taxes, your withholdings. Kind of project that out and say, “All right, here’s what I think I’m going to owe at the end of the day. Here’s what I’ve withheld. Here are the estimated payments that I made, and am I going to be in a good spot?” Maybe I am. I mean, at this point, there’s not a whole lot you can do from withholding standpoint. But you can change that going forward. You can make estimated payments now. So you want to do that. You want to make sure you maximize your HSA contributions, IRA, any of those types of things. So make sure you’re taking advantage of anything, any benefits that your employers are giving in that regard. 

If you’ve over contributed, so those limits I mentioned before, if you’ve gone over that, make sure to correct those. Take that cash back out or re-characterize them for next year because, otherwise, you’ll end up getting penalties on those. If you are able to contribute to charity, make sure you have a conscious strategy regarding that. You can use donor-advised funds, which we didn’t get into. But it’s kind of like mutual funds for charitable contributions. Think about your capital gains, so things I just mentioned. If you’re sitting there going, “Oh, my goodness. I’ve been buying coffee every day with crypto,” you got to kind of think about that, and maybe go back, and take a look, and see what your gains were or your losses might have been on those, and think about how to apply those going forward. 

Then just make sure you have all of your documentation ready to go and saved down and everything. Then just decide what you’re going to do, or you’re going to do it yourself. Do you want to reach out and hire somebody to prepare your taxes for you? Or better yet, reach out to somebody who can actually be a partner throughout the course of the year and give you more of that guidance and really align your tax strategy with the rest of your financial strategy like it should be.

[00:34:27] TU: Great stuff, Sean. For those that have listened to this episode or have followed us for some time and this concept of year round planning from a tax standpoint, if that really resonates with you and really aligning your taxes in a more strategic, proactive, look ahead way, yes, of course, we’ll do the filing. But we really want to be a partner with you throughout the year so that we can optimize that situation and employ much of what we talked about here. Really, we just, I think, scratched the surface on some of this as well. 

If you’re interested in working with Sean and his team over at YFP Tax, you can visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/tax. There, you can learn more about the services. You can sign up to join the waitlist for the 2022 filing season. As well, you can also reach out to Sean directly if you have a question, [email protected]

Sean, thanks so much for coming on the show and looking forward to having you involved in future episodes as well.

[00:35:21] SR: Yeah. Thanks for having me. I’m looking forward to it as well and looking forward to getting into tax season, hearing from some of the listeners. So have a good one. 

[00:35:28] TU: Awesome. Thank you. 

[END OF INTERVIEW]

[00:35:30] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. 

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts, and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of Your Financial Pharmacist, unless otherwise noted, and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward-looking statements that are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. 

Thank you, again, for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week. 

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 278: YFP Planning Case Study #4: Selling a Pharmacy and Leaving a Legacy Before Transitioning Into Retirement


YFP Co-Founder & Director of Financial Planning, Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP® is joined by YFP Planning Lead Planners, Kelly Reddy-Heffner, CFP®, CSLP®, CDFA®, and Robert Lopez, CFP®, to discuss selling a pharmacy and leaving a legacy before transitioning into retirement

About Today’s Guests

Kelly Reddy-Heffner, CFP®, CSLP®, CDFA®

Kelly Reddy-Heffner, CFP®, CSLP®, CDFA® is a Lead Planner at YFP Planning. She enjoys time with her husband and two sons, riding her bike, running, and keeping after her pup ‘Fred Rogers.’ Kelly loves to cheer on her favorite team, plan travel, and ironically loves great food but does not enjoy cooking at all. She volunteers in her community as part of the Chambersburg Rotary. Kelly believes that there are no quick fixes to financial confidence, and no guarantees on investment returns, but there is value in seeking trusted advice to get where you want to go. Kelly’s mission is to help clients go confidently toward their happy place.

Robert Lopez, CFP®

Robert Lopez, CFP®, is a Lead Planner at YFP Planning. Along with his team members, he helps YFP Planning clients on their financial journey to live their best lives. To go along with his CFP® designation, Robert has a B.S. in Finance and an M.S. in Family Financial Planning. Prior to his career in financial planning, Robert worked as an Explosive Ordnance Disposal Technician in the United States Air Force. Although no longer on active duty, he still participates as a member of the Air Force Reserves. When not working, Robert enjoys being outdoors, playing co-ed volleyball and kickball, catching a game of ultimate frisbee, or hiking with his wife Shirley, young son Spencer, and their dogs, Meeko and Willow. 

Episode Summary

In this week’s episode, YFP Co-Founder & Director of Financial Planning, Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP® is joined by YFP Planning Lead Planners, Kelly Reddy-Heffner, CFP®, CSLP®, CDFA®, and Robert Lopez, CFP®, to discuss YFP Planning Case Study #4. In this case study, Tim, Kelly, and Robert delve into the financial details of a fictitious family, the Patels. Aman Patel is a 59-year-old independent pharmacy owner looking to sell his pharmacy to his daughter, Jessie. Jessie currently works on staff at the pharmacy. Amin’s wife, Hannah, is a teacher with questions about her retirement pension and social security claiming strategies. Amin and Hannah also own a rental property they are looking to sell and want to know how best to use the proceeds of that sale as they are approaching retirement. Together, Tim, Kelly, and Robert cover the details of the Patels’ retirement timeline. They dive deep into how the Patel family will need to coordinate with a CPA and an attorney to best structure the succession plan for the pharmacy with considerations for both Jessie, who has student debt, and themselves as pre-retirees. Lastly, they explain planning options for the Patel family’s investments and insurance policies as they approach their transition to retirement. 

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRO]

[00:00:00] TB: You’re listening to the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast, a show all about inspiring you, the pharmacy professional, on your path towards achieving financial freedom. Hi, I’m Tim Baker, and today I chat with YFP Planning’s lead planners, Kelly Reddy-Heffner and Robert Lopez, to walk through our fourth case study of a fictitious family, the Patels. 

Aman Patel is 59 and is an independent pharmacy owner, who was looking to sell his pharmacy to his daughter, Jesse, who currently works on staff at the pharmacy. We discuss the Patels’ retirement timeline and how they’ll need to coordinate with an attorney and CPA to best structure the succession plan to Jessie. Aman’s wife, Hannah, is 55 and works as a teacher. At retirement, she’ll receive a pension and has questions of how to claim it, along with how to claim Social Security. 

We also discuss questions about what they should do with their rental property and how they should handle the proceeds, whether they should pay down debt or invest. Finally, we discuss their investments and insurance policies, as they approach this very important transition. 

[EPISODE]

[00:00:57] TB: What’s up, everyone? Welcome to our fourth case study in our series. Glad to be back with you. We’re going to today go through the Patels. The Patels are going to be a little bit of a different case. So in the past, we’ve through a couple in their 30s, a couple in their 40s, a couple in their 60s. Now, we’re actually going to talk about Aman Patel and Hannah Patel, who are a couple in their 50s, who were actually a pharmacy owner. So I’m glad to welcome back Kelly and Robert to go through this case study. Guys, what’s going on?

[00:01:25] KRH: Doing well. 

[00:01:25] RL: Just staying cool out here in Phoenix.

[00:01:29] TB: Awesome. So let’s jump into our guy. So like I said, we’re going to be talking about the Patels and what they’re looking at as they approach retirement. So, Robert, why don’t you set us up, like we’ve done in previous cases, and kind of go through their overall demographic, what they’re looking at, where they live? Kelly, you’re going to get into goals and debt. Then I’ll kind of take us home with the rest of the balance sheet.

[00:01:50] RL: Yeah. So let’s jump right in. So we have Aman and Hannah Patel. So Aman is a pharmacy owner. He’s 59 years old. The salary he’s pulling out of the business is $150,000 a year. Obviously, as a pharmacy owner, he has no other income. That’s kind of his main source. His wife is a teacher. She’s 55. She makes $75,000 a year. Then she has some tutoring and support on the side, where she makes an additional $10,000 a year. They file their taxes jointly, and they are joining the pharmacy by their daughter, Jesse, who is a 29-year-old single pharmacist, who works through the pharmacy as well. 

They are residents of St. Paul, Minnesota. Their income numbers break down to a gross of $235,000, which breaks down to 19,005 monthly and roughly $9,500 net, beating after taxes, contributions, and insurance. So those expenses break down to roughly like a 40-20-40 fixed expenses, variable expenses, and savings. They’re living in a three-bedroom single-family home that they purchased back in 2005, when the prices were good, and it was a 30-year-mortgage at 5.75%. They were able to refinance in 2012, down to 3.5%, and they have about $155,000 left on that mortgage.

[00:03:04] KRH: All right. In terms of goals, they both want to retire in the next several years. Aman would like to sell the pharmacy to daughter, Jesse, and help her with that transition. Hannah will receive a teacher’s pension. So that is about $2,500 per month. But she doesn’t quite know how to claim that, how it works. Then also, knowing what their Social Security benefit might be as well is important. 

They are interested in no longer having a rental income property and would like to sell that, along with the pharmacy. But they are interested in staying in the St. Paul area. They have questions about paying off their debt, as they’re looking for that financial independence and retirement. Aman wants to golf more regularly and take those trips abroad, and Hannah wants to be more involved with charitable endeavors. They both want to help Jessie as much as possible, both as a new pharmacy owner, and she has some student loan debt as well. 

So the debt in question that we’ll be looking at is that there is still the home equity line of credit that looks like a balance of about 10,000. They’re paying aggressively on that, and it does have the interest rate of the 5%, as Robert mentioned. There is a car note of about 15,000. That has an interest rate of 4%. They’re paying 250 per month on that. Then they do have that mortgage payment for their primary residence, just under $1,400 for that and about 10 years remaining.

[00:04:41] TB: From a wealth-building perspective and, again, kind of bouncing back and forth between the net worth statement, they have about $50,000 in cash in the checking account and then another $75,000 in a high-yield savings account. They have a variety of investment accounts, Roth IRAs for both of them, 403(b) for Hannah, the SEP IRA that Aman has through the pharmacy, and then a taxable account that they’ve been contributing to. 

For the 403(b), Hannah has that, in addition to her pension. She puts about 10% in, which is about $15,000. She’s invested in balanced funds. Aman’s SEP IRA that he puts money into, he tries to target about $1,000 a month or $12,000 a year. He’s more conservative with his allocation. The Roth IRAs they’ve had in recent years contributed to, but they’ve stopped because they’re over the threshold for married filing jointly. Right now, they’re directing all those funds to their joint taxable accounts. So it’s about $1,400 a month or nearly $70,000 a year. Again, in terms of the allocation for the Roth IRAs, bounce more for Hannah, conservative more for Aman. Basically, the taxable account is going to be used to supplement their retirement. 

On the real estate perspective, they do have their primary home that they’ve purchased, and it’s worth about 395,000, with about 155,000 left on the mortgage. They have a rental property, which was their first home that they didn’t sell. Once they purchased the most recent one, that’s worth about 275,000 with no mortgage. Then Aman had did a recent evaluation on the pharmacy, and he thinks that the pharmacy is worth about 750,000. So that’s basically the balance sheet. 

From a wealth protection perspective, Aman has a $1.5 million term policy, life insurance policy that will expire at age 70. Hannah has one quarter of a million dollars that will expire at age 66. Aman has no short-term or long-term disability. Hannah has what she has through an employer, which basically covers 60% short term, 60% long term. Professional liability, Aman has his own policy. Then there’s the documents that definitely need to be dusted off, need to be updated and reviewed, especially with kind of the sale of the business upcoming. So they’re going to have to engage in attorneys for the sale and as the attorney to kind of get that rolling. 

From a tax perspective, Aman has an account he’s used for the last 10 years. Then they’re just concerned about how the taxes are going to be treated related to sell on the business. So they have to kind of navigate that. So miscellaneous things kind of makes additional income, as Kelly said, with school activities, and she might continue to do that post retirement. Cash flow and staffing issues are top issues during the transition. So I’m just making sure that the [inaudible 00:07:25] have the adequate staffing to make sure that Jesse is not killing herself initially. 

They have questions about, when do they – What’s the timing on the rental property? What do they do with the proceeds? Do they invest that? They’re kind of leaning towards more paying off the debt. Then Jesse wants to expand services at the pharmacy to increase lines of revenue. But Aman is less sure. So you kind of have that change management that they’re going to have to negotiate in terms of like who is the boss and when and what that looks like. 

So a lot of stuff going here, guys. Kelly, I’ll start with you. What would be some of the things that jump off the page for you in terms of what we need to tackle with regard to the financial plan?

[00:08:08] KRH: I mean, I guess the top priority would be the sale of the pharmacy, since it relates to funds they’d have available for retirement, also helping to take care of Jesse in the process as well. This certainly would speak to needing an attorney to be involved in some tax planning as well. But I guess one of the things to think through would be like how much – Jesse has student loans. Her resources might not be robust to do an outright sale, if the value of the pharmacy is $750,000. So sometimes, those family sales can be structured over time, deciding if there’s an interest rate or as part of it a gift. It would all be things that would be important to think about. 

It may be that smaller increments would be helpful for the family, in terms of planning as well, just to keep that tax liability for Aman and Hannah a little bit more manageable from year to year. So I guess that’s where I would start is getting some professional input to see what their options are, what an interest rate might look like, and how Jesse might be able to facilitate payment. That might also touch on the question of who’s making decisions. If it’s a partial buyout, if – I think those are always important things. Like the non-dollar and cents is just some of those logistics about how decisions will be made, who is going to be the board of directors, how to transition out. If you still have kind of a foot in the door, what does that mean in terms of your input and say?

[00:09:47] TB: Yeah. This is definitely one of those instances where as the CFP, I think you’re trying to quarterback in bringing different professionals because, obviously, from a legal perspective, from a tax perspective, an attorney, a CPA are going to have insight in terms of how to best structure this, and then kind of herd the cats along with a financial plan to see, okay, how does this all fit together? 

But, yeah, timing of like the sale. Is it a complete sale? Is it something that invests over time? How does the tax work in terms of capital gains on the sale of that? How do you structure a promissory note? Is there money down? Is Jesse taking less of a salary and doing more sweat equity? Or is she kind of being paid as an independent pharmacist would at a market rate? So those are all things I think that like those would be questions that bringing in other professionals to help kind of navigate that. 

Rob, I don’t know your take, but I think like three to five years, I think the time is now to start those conversations because I think it’s going to – Especially with an asset like this, it’s going to take longer than they think. So outside of kind of bringing in some of the professionals to start asking and answering some of these questions, what else would you want to know more about, whether it’s goals or what that looks like, with regard to their planning in kind of this transition that’s coming up?

[00:11:10] RL: Yeah. How much does he really want to work after that, right? So he’s 59 right now. Is he saying, “We’re going to stop working at 62 or 65.”? Is this a, “I want to have this transition started in three to five years.”? If he’s going to continue to work, especially helping her out, right? If she’s taking on the purchase of the business, she’s going to have to decrease expenses, and she may do that. Decrease that sweat equity, right? But she’s going to need help from a staffing perspective. 

So if he’s going to be working there into the future, then, yeah, the time is now to get that transition started. So that way, she can slowly take over, while he’s still accruing an income and then working on transitioning that business. I think a real perspective on not only when they want to sell the pharmacy but when he wants to fully retire will set that timeline from a payout perspective is what we are working with the lawyers and the accountants to decide what the timetable or the time horizon is for that buyout. That’ll factor in pretty strongly.

[00:12:07] TB: Yeah. I think like it could be one of those things, where if you’re doing some part-time staffing at a pharmacy that your daughter’s drawn in that you kind of built that, that might be a little bit more enjoyable in the later years of your career, where you’re not having to worry about payroll, or you’re not having to worry about management and things like that. Obviously, you’re mentoring your daughter. But maybe it just kind of takes a lot of the stress off of you, and it can extend your career. 

The thing that I would have bouncing around in my head is, okay, how can we structure this if it’s a seller finance and note that we can get paid enough to kind of get to that age 70, where Social Security – The strategy might be to delay that. Take money from the retirement accounts, delay Social Security, and then use that structured note as a way to kind of bridge that period. So I think those are the discussions in terms of like how long is that note going to be? What’s the interest rate to, Kelly, your point? If it’s not a market interest rate that that has to be considered a gift that we have to kind of track and make sure that we’re accounted for. 

So these are all things. I think it goes back to the goals, right? So like when do you see yourself getting out? Is that something where it’s a clean break? There’s a note in here about Jesse kind of wants to – She wants to expand services. Is Aman going to be on board with that, if he’s still majority owner, if it’s like a 50-50 thing? Or is it at this day, in January 1, 2028 or whatever it is, that they’re going to you, basically, hand the keys to Jesse, and then it’s going to be here’s the run. Those are all things I think to get on the table and flesh out to make sure it works for everyone. 

Kelly, what’s your take in terms of like – It sounds like they kind of want to simplify life. Obviously, passing on the ownership of the pharmacy to Jesse, they talked about selling the rental property and kind of getting out of the landlord game. What’s your take in terms of timing of that, what to do with the proceeds, etc.?

[00:14:15] KRH: I guess the timing of the sale of the rental property is a pretty well time to have this conversation with the way the housing market is at present. So I guess that’s always a factor, like depending on the urgency, like understanding the market factors in like is it now. Is it maybe wait a bit? We have at present such an interesting situation. We’re coming off like really high rates for purchases, low interest rates earlier in the summer now with the rates rising. So I guess that would be a component is kind of getting some professional advice about the market and whether now is the time. 

In terms of what to do with it, like I think it would be interesting to build out. I’ve heard you in the podcast, Tim, talk about the retirement paycheck. So kind of what do they need to have? That pension for Hannah adds a really nice resource, understanding at what year she gets what amount. If there are any other benefits from that pension would be good to know. Like are there any health care benefits, any disability, survivor benefits? So details there but then kind of looking at what’s coming in from the pension, getting their Social Security statements poured. 

Then you can took take a look at expenses and see like, okay, well, then I feel like then you’re looking at the debts and seeing like, well, what really does need to be paid off to make that paycheck work with the resources. The rate of the 5% is on the high side. So I like that they’re aggressively paying that off. That probably would be the top thing I would target. The car and the mortgage a little bit less. So but, again, depending on resource, if they really don’t want to have any payments, that does come back to personal preference. We can run some numbers. It’s probably a combination of the two. Like does the paycheck work? Do the financial numbers work? Just how they feel about having some debt going into retirement. 

[00:16:18] TB: Yeah. What’s not represented here is probably like what is the rental income that they’re getting from that. So obviously, giving that up for the potential of liquidating the 275,000, which was what we think it’s worth and then, again, how to apply that to the debt. To your point, I’m less concerned about that. I think maybe getting rid of the HELOC. Maybe the car note and then keeping the mortgage rolling could be kind of a balance. 

But right now, where the market is, is like if you have cash to potentially put in the market, now’s the best time to do it because of how depressed prices are. Again, not an advocate of timing the market, but it could be that we’ve lined up the sale along with – To Robert’s point, when we exit the pharmacy and kind of do it in one fell swoop. Or just kind of let the market drive it in terms of maybe you list it for sale or you try to rent it simultaneously and see what comes out. So I think there’s a little bit of give there. We don’t – There’s not an overwhelming need for cash, I think, as we as we sit here but definitely something to kind of, again, flesh out with regard to the plan. 

Robert, from an insurance perspective, is there anything that kind of jumps out here? Obviously, Kelly mentioned the pension. One of the things I did look up in Minnesota, if you’re a state employee, you do get Social Security as well. So she’ll have that. A lot of state employees don’t pay in Social Securities. They don’t have that benefit. So that’ll – She’ll kind of be able to get both. But in terms of like looking at the pension, looking at health care, Medicare, she has some life disability. Do you have any big concerns from an insurance perspective, as you’re kind of approaching this plan?

[00:18:01] RL: It’s hard to say kind of what that overall perspective looks like. I think their life insurance policies are in a good place right now. Aman’s going to go out till 70. She’s going to go till 66. She’s got the short-term long-term disability and Social Security disability benefits from them. He doesn’t have any disability benefits. But as a pharmacy owner with a daughter working there, you could probably finagle some work that you could still accomplish for an income. 

The professional liability is there. I’d be interested in starting to look at maybe some long-term care, depending on what the parents look like. What does mom and dad look like from then? Are they still around? Is this something that they’re going to have to care for? Then what that longevity looks like for Hannah and Aman. Are they going to be expecting to do some long-term care? Because as we approach that age 60, it starts to become more of a conversation of is this a policy we need to be looking into? But yeah. 

[00:18:51] TB: Yeah. I think the other thing – So if we look at – You kind of mentioned not having anything through the pharmacy. I think one of the things that is glaring is the lack of a 401(k) offering, which a lot of small businesses, independent pharmacies don’t offer. I think it’s because of like the expense related to 401(k)s. I think there are options out there. So that would be something that I would be talking too about them, once the dust settles or some of these initial things, is to kind of open up that bucket. So they can defer. Jesse could defer for herself. Even if Aman is planning to do that, it’s to kind of set up that bucket. So it’s another place to basically get retirement funds set aside. So I would definitely encourage that. 

In terms of the investments, obviously, they’re pretty conservative to balance between the two of them, which is not necessarily a bad thing to be three to five years from retirement. That’s probably fine. But when we get post retirement and kind of outside of the eye of the storm with [inaudible 00:19:53] risk, we’re going to have to adjust that once we get kind of everything rolling. 

But, yeah, I think the big thing here is really to start the conversations, if they haven’t already, and with the CPA, with the attorney, just to make sure everything is tracking to what they’re trying to do. I think the big thing that I would be talking to the two of them about is you got to make sure you’re taking – Anytime you have kids, it’s making sure you’re taking care of yourself and your retirement and not being, I don’t want to say, overly generous with the deal. But you want to make sure that it’s structured in a way that benefits both. 

I know you’re concerned about Jesse’s loans as well. But at the end of the day, we need to make sure that the retirement nest egg has longevity and that Aman and Hannah don’t have to go back into the workforce to kind of sustain their livelihoods. So a lot going on here. Anything else that you guys would call out with regard to the plan?

[00:20:49] RL: A good taxable investment that they’re doing, I think there might be a better use for that. Basically, it sounds like they took some of that mortgage money that they weren’t paying before, minus the property taxes, and they started putting it into a taxable account, which is a strong idea. Let’s have that money grow for us in the future. But I think if we’re putting that in 1,400 hours a month, that money – We could max out her 403(b). So let’s get that 403(b) maxed out. That brings down the adjusted gross income, which might even get us below or close to that threshold, where we could start making some sort of Roth contributions again.

They’re over 50, so they get a little bit of plus up, so using a little bit of gap there. So if we can get under that threshold, that would be a nice place to just get more money going towards the retirement, instead of in a taxable account.

[00:21:27] TB: That’s great point. So the catch up for the Roth IRAs, they could put up to 7,000. So 6,000 plus $1,000 catch up. Then for the 403(b), I think they have a special provision, where it’s 20,500. I think it’s an extra 6,500 for catch up. 403(b)s have kind of some special rules with regard to the catch up, but that would be another place to put dollars. I definitely want to see a balance of Roth, taxable, and pre-tax, which I think they have a good – But to your point, they probably could plus up more into Hannah’s, potentially open up the Roth IRA. I think they have a sizable enough taxable portion that if they needed to draw from that, in addition to IRAs, as they’re waiting to claim Social Security, there’s probably enough there to do that. Again, we’d have to model that out and see. But potentially, take advantage of the 403(b) while it’s there. So that’s a great point, Robert. Anything else that you guys would fall out here? I think we covered a lot of ground.

[00:22:29] KRH: I mean, I would agree with the investment assessment. I mean, even exploring backdoor Roths if they’re over the limit. At some point, you’ll model Roth conversions, potentially as well with other resources when the time is right. I guess the other thing with insurance too, if he does sell it, if Aman sells the pharmacy to his daughter, and there’s a buy-sell agreement, like often that involves insurance as well, if they’re partners and kind of just keeping an eye on that. 

[00:22:59] TB: Liability, cross purchase, key person, all of those things probably just need to be relooked at and potentially even bringing in an insurance professional to make sure that that’s all looking good. Yeah. So I think those are good points as well. 

Well, guys, I really appreciate the thoughts on this. I think a lot of work to do. I think a lot of coordination, obviously, with the sale of an asset, transitioning into retirement, working with family. There’s I think good constructive conversation to be had. So I appreciate your guys’ thoughts on this case study today, and I’m looking forward to doing the next one. 

[00:23:32] KRH: Okay. 

[00:23:32] RL: Sounds good. 

[00:23:33] KRH: Thank you.

[OUTRO]

[00:23:34] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. 

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts, and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of Your Financial Pharmacist, unless otherwise noted, and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward-looking statements that are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. 

Thank you, again, for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week. 

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 275: How to Build a Retirement Paycheck (Retirement Planning)


How to Build a Retirement Paycheck (Retirement Planning)

In the fourth episode of the four-part series on retirement planning, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, and Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP®, discuss how to build a retirement paycheck.

Episode Summary

In this week’s episode, Your Financial Pharmacist Co-founders Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, and Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP®, wrap up our four-part retirement planning series by discussing how to build a retirement paycheck. Highlights from the show include a discussion on retirement income planning and how social security claiming strategies fit into retirement income planning. Three critical issues addressed include how to replace your paycheck with your retirement income that meets your retirement expense needs, how to plan for large one-time expenditures in retirement, and how to mitigate the risks one faces in retirement. Tim Baker shares three approaches to building a retirement paycheck, The Flooring Strategy, The Bucket Strategy, and The Systematic Withdrawal Strategy. Tim dives into the theory behind each and how to put them to use in your retirement planning. When it comes to retirement, the value of a financial planner throughout the timeline of your life is tremendous, not just in the accumulation phase of your retirement planning. It is valuable to take stock of where you are now regarding the social security statement, cash flow, budget, and net worth, in addition to plans for retirement. Tim Baker explains how life planning plays an integral role in retirement planning, often ahead of financial planning to build the retirement lifestyle you envision with a paycheck to match. 

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRO]

[00:00:00] TU: Hey, everybody. Tim Ulbrich here, and thank you for listening to the YFP Podcast, where each week we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. 

On this week’s episode, Tim Baker and I wrap up our four-part retirement planning series by discussing how to build a retirement paycheck. Highlights from the show include discussing what retirement income planning is, three key issues when determining a retirement income plan, how Social Security fits into retirement income planning, and three different approaches to use or consider using when building a retirement paycheck.

Before we jump into the show, I recognize that many listeners may not be aware of what the team at YFP Planning does in working one-on-one with more than 250 households in 40-plus states. YFP Planning offers fee-only high-touch financial planning that is customized to the pharmacy professional. If you’re interested in learning more about how working one-on-one with a certified financial planner may help you achieve your financial goals, you can book a free discovery call by visiting yfpplanning.com. Whether or not YFP Planning’s financial planning services are a good fit for you, know that we appreciate your support of this podcast and our mission to help pharmacists achieve financial freedom. 

Okay, let’s jump into my conversation with certified financial planner, Tim Baker. 

[INTERVIEW]

[00:01:17] TU: Hey, everyone. Welcome to this week’s episode of the YFP Podcast. We are on our fourth and final part of our series on retirement planning. On episode 272, we talked about determining how much is enough, building that nest egg. Episode 273, we discussed the alphabet soup of retirement accounts. What are the different options or at least the tax favored accounts that we’ll focus on potentially? Then last week on episode 274, we talked about risk tolerance versus risk capacity and determining or beginning to determine our asset allocation plan. 

So this week, we’re going to talk about how to build a retirement paycheck. Ultimately, we’re at the point where we’ve accrued that nest egg we established at the very beginning, and the question is now what, right? How are we going to distribute those funds and ultimately replace what was our W2 income and be able to replace that with the various investments and buckets of savings that we’ve accrued over the years? 

So Tim, this feels like an overlooked topic and one that is not often discussed. You recently shared with me that, really, up until more recently, it has not even been foundational in the Certified Financial Planner training. So why is that the case with what appears to be such an important topic?

[00:02:28] TB: I think it’s kind of rooted in for a long time, the predominant advisor that was out there was – I’m not going to say an advisor was a broker. So when you work with a financial advisor back in the day, it was kind of more to transact investment trades. So it was you calling your broker and saying like, “Hey, I like this stock,” or, “I like this mutual fund,” or whatever. Like, “What do you think?” Then that would be the exchange. Really, it was more about placing the orders than kind of looking at something more comprehensively. 

The problem, though, is that even like in the CFP’s like curriculum, I feel like most of it is really geared around the accumulation stage of like gathering assets, and this is how to understand modern portfolio theory in investment, all that kind of stuff. But it’s kind of like when you get to the end, it’s like, “Okay, now what?” Like, “What do you –” We have these buckets of money that are separated between a Roth IRA a 401(k). You might have money in a pension. 

What we’re really trying to figure out is like, okay, how do we convert these pools of money into a steady, sustainable retirement paycheck that’s going to last the rest of your life? It’s really hard to do. It’s really hard to do. Again, like, I’ve worked with firms where the conversation is, “Hey, Tim. You’re the client. We’re going into 2023. What do you need next year?” I think that like if you’re in that relationship of like you’re kind of just advising on stocks or investments, maybe that holds up. 

But I think like what we’re seeing, like if I’m the client, the first question I would ask to that question was like, “Well, what can I take?” Like, “What can I take, so I don’t run out of money,” advice. Or like –

[00:04:19] TU: Shift of conversations. Yup.

[00:04:20] TB: Yeah. Tell me that like. It’s nice that – That’s kind of like what we talked about in previous episode is like investments are really important. But I think if you’re working with someone comprehensively, it shifts more to like, okay, what are the investments and less about the tactical and more about the strategic approach of like, “Okay, now that we’ve accumulated all these assets, like how can we do this with the mountain risks that we face?” 

Because one of the really hard parts about this, Tim, is like you could live to your 72 or you can live to your 102. We have no idea. 

[00:04:54] TU: That’s right. Yeah. 

[00:04:55] TB: Without that major variable of like the duration of the plan, which is connected to your life, super hard, right? So I think the industry is changing, where it’s trying to equip advisors with more tools and more education around this shift from the accumulation phase to withdrawal phase and really have meaningful conversations with clients because this is only going to get more important, right? The data says that roughly 10,000, baby boomers turn age 65 every day, and half of them have never really calculated where they’re at with what they need to maintain their lifestyle. 

So it is kind of a little bit of like flying by the seat of your pants. Like I said, it’s just a complex thing. If you’re looking at how do we convert assets to income streams while keeping the tax man in mind, and those income streams could be Social Security. It could be working part-time in retirement. How does that affect your Social Security paycheck? It could be distributed money from a 401(k) or a taxable account or a Roth IRA. There’s very strict ways you should do that to maximize your taxes or minimize your taxes, I should say. 

It could be a pension or like you convert part of that bucket of money into an annuity, along with – We’ll talk about that more with the flooring strategy. How does your home play a part in this? A lot of people kind of discount the home, even when that’s going to be the biggest expense of any retiree is your home. That’s typically at any phase of retirement, except for maybe like old old, where it might be more of a health – Those people that are kind of 90s plus is more medical expensive. 

So it is a complex thing to basically tackle, and you wouldn’t think it would be that hard because a lot of people are like, “Oh, $1,000,000. Four percent, $40,000. We’re good.” Kind of wipe your hands of it, and you’re good to go. But it’s a lot more complicated than that.

[00:06:59] TU: Yeah. I think it’s a good reminder, and I’m glad we’re digging into this topic, really, for the first time in detail. I think we’ve certainly spent a lot of time on the show talking about the accumulation phase. But to your point, we very much tend to oversimplify this, right? You need 3.2 in a nest egg. Or you need – Based on the four percent rule, you can draw so much per year. 

Well, what about all the various asset pools that are out there, right? What about your home, whether you’re going to work at all during retirement? How does that impact how and when you withdraw? What about all the tax strategies? What about taxable accounts versus tax-deferred accounts? I mean, just so many different layers to consider here. Then, obviously, Social Security is another one to put on top of that as well. 

So important that we’re thinking not only about the accumulation but also what’s the strategy and the optimization. I think this is another great example where like, in my opinion, obviously, bias, like the value of a financial planner is a lifelong journey. So early on, we’re working on accumulation, getting started, really understanding our options and our vehicles, doing it at a tax-efficient way. 

Here, we’re talking about a whole another host of things that when you look at advisor fees and other things that are involved, like if done well, the return on investment there is very strong, not only numerically in terms of tax saving optimization, but also in terms of having that third party, having somebody affirming and making sure that you’re feeling comfortable and confident in the distribution of all the hard work you’ve done to accumulate along the way.

[00:08:30] TB: Yeah. I think the big thing that I would say along those lines is that I think the difference between advisors today and then advisors of your, like it’s more of a collaborative process. Before, it might be like, “Hey, what do you need?” Or this is like what you get type of thing. Whereas more it’s coming from like a place of like what’s going on and like what are the things that are going on in your life and then basically constructing that from that approach. 

I think it is more of a collaborative approach versus like us saying this is what it is or waving our finger or whatever. So like I think that’s a big distinction to make too. 

[00:09:12] TU: Tim, what are some of the key issues? So here we’re talking about retirement income planning. Ultimately, we’re discussing how to build this retirement paycheck. What are some of the key issues that folks need to be thinking about when it comes to building this retirement income and planning for this?

[00:09:29] TB: Yeah. So the three big things that are out there are how do you replace a paycheck with kind of a stable source of income to meet your basic retirement expenses, which, again, can be a tough thing to figure out because you snap your fingers, Tim, and like you’re not going to work. So like how are you spending your day? 

For some people, it might be you’re just sitting in a room because your spouse is still working. For other people, it’s like your guys are both retired. So it’s like, “Hey, school’s out.” You’re kind of throwing your books in the air. You’re traveling. You’re dining out. You’re doing all those things that you didn’t do. So like maybe your expenses go up. 

So I think sitting down and looking at like what does retirement look like for you and trying to sketch out. We talked about budgets with clients, younger clients, and like they don’t go away like because like a big part of this equation is like how much you’re going to spend. So how do we give you a paycheck that’s going to meet your basic retirement expenses, number one? 

The second thing is how do you plan for those one time, large, large expenditures that are planned? So that might be like a car purchase, like big vacations. It could be –

[00:10:42] TU: Second properties, right?

[00:10:43] TB: Second property. It could be paying for a son or a daughter’s wedding. Like those types of things are big. Then the last part is like how do we start to not inoculate but mitigate the risks that you face in retirement. The risks are many. There’s lots of potential potholes that are out there that can trip you up. One is like life expectancy. We don’t know how long you’re going to live. So a lot of people, they base their Social Security decision making on, “Well, my uncle died at this age, and my dad died at this age, and I’m just going to take it,” which is typically not – 

Sometimes, it’s advisable. But sometimes, it’s not because the other thing that we have to remember is that in Social Security, your spouse gets the larger of the benefit that you’re collecting. So if I claim early because my life expectancy in my mind is lower, my benefit is going to be reduced. But it still might be better for me to wait and defer, so that benefit grows. So then like maybe I collected for four or five years, but then Shea would get that when I kick the bucket. 

So those are things that people just don’t think about. So life expectancy, big risk. Inflation. So sources of retirement income need to increase at the same rate as the cost of goods and services, which right now is tough, right? Because we were seeing a spike in inflation. So how do we combat that, the inflation, and how do we how do we make sure that the – So that’s another reason that Social Security is great because it gets cost of living adjustments every year, most years, that keeps pace with inflation. Most products out there do not. Even if you buy an annuity on the street, Social Security is going to beat that every single time. 

The other one is a death of a spouse. So income needs don’t necessarily go in half when your spouse dies. So how do we – Is that looking at things like insurance or second to die policies? The things like that to make sure that you are okay that you had two Social Security income streams, and now you only have one. It’s the greater one. But like how do we plan for that? 

Health care. So we know that’s increasing exponentially. How do we plan for that long-term care? So this is the possibility of needing care for those everyday activities like eating and bathing and using the bathroom, those types of things. I think the majority of people, they use family members. But do you buy a policy to help with that?

Investment returns. We talked about, Tim, the stock market is volatile. Fixed income portfolios, which are often retirement portfolios because we want more of that safety in principle, like those things changes over time. So right now, it’s probably good to look at things that have something with inflation tied into that. 

Then probably the last one, which I think is the most dangerous one, is the sequence of returns risk. So this is the risk of receiving a lower or negative returns early in your retirement when withdrawals are made. That’s what I talked about last episode. If your portfolio goes from a $1 million to $600,000, and then you’re taking 40,000 or 50,000 dollars a year out of that, it’s almost impossible to overcome both of those. 

So that’s where it goes back to like is your asset allocation right when you get into that eye of the storm before retirement. If it isn’t, maybe the hardest conversation that we have to have is like we have to wait for the market to recover because, ultimately, you might have to go back to work anyway if you go out and then you have to go back because we just don’t have enough money to sustain you for the rest of your life. 

So those are probably not all of the risks that are out there, Tim, but a good amount of the risk that you’re facing as you’re kind of saying, “Okay, how do I take this pot of money that I have and make it last for the next 30 years or so?”

[00:14:40] TU: Yeah. The example of that last one, Tim, the sequence of returns, I think about folks that have retired in the last, what, 12 to 24 months, right? If there wasn’t kind of a change of asset allocation in the eye of the storm, as you talk about. Some folks might be feeling that in the moment, right? I saw the portfolio drop significantly, and maybe that did or did not change. If they had more than enough saved, maybe that didn’t matter as much. But maybe that means going back to work for a little bit of time or elongating the timeline to retirement. 

Again, so important that we’re really planning this from beginning, all the way through the actual withdrawal phases.

[00:15:15] TB: Yeah. One thing to note is that sometimes this is out of your control, like when you’re going to retire. Sometimes, it’s like –

[00:15:22] TU: That’s right. 

[00:15:23] TB: When there is a downturn in the market, it’s also because the economy is bad. So companies could be looking to either get you out the door or force retirement, and that can be really, really bad for your – I talk to my dad a lot. Like his company was bought by another company, and he was kind of winding down. But he was not ready to retire yet. But he was kind of duplicitous. They’re like, “Hey, you’re kind of on the chopping block here.” 

So that is the other thing is like sometimes we assume. Just like what I was talking about, some people assume they’re going to die early, so they take – Most of the time, they like outlive what they think. But the other part of that is we assume that like when I asked you the question, “Hey, Tim, like when do you want to retire,” and you say, “Hey, I will retire at full retirement age.” For us, it’s 67. That that’s actually going to be an option. 

[00:16:12] TU: In our decision, right? Yup. 

[00:16:14] TB: Yeah. Sometimes, it’s either because of job, or it’s because of the health of yourself or a family member that causes you to retire earlier than you expected. Something like 40% of people kind of fall into that bucket.

[00:16:29] TU: That’s a good point and a good reminder. Before we get too deep into talking a little bit more about Social Security and then specifically three different approaches and strategies to build your retirement paycheck, I want to reference folks to a resource that they can use to download, follow along with some of the discussion, as well as provide some other information. That resource is What Should I Consider Before I Retire. It talks about some of the considerations around cash flow, assets and debt, health care and insurance, tax planning, long-term planning, and other topics as well. You can download that at yourfinancialpharmacist.com/retire. Again, yourfinancialpharmacist.com/retire. 

Tim, we can’t go too far into this topic without talking about Social Security. You’ve dabbled in it a little bit already. We talked about it in episode 242, which was Social Security 101, history, how it works, why it matters. One of the most common questions for good reasons is when. When should I begin to withdraw or begin to have access to Social Security? We all know. We’ve heard it before that the difference is significant between if we take it early at 62 or we wait until the age of 70. 

So give us some more information here on why this is such an important topic, what the differences can be in those numbers, and obviously the role that Social Security can play and will play likely in building retirement paycheck.

[00:17:47] TB: Yeah. I would even back up before we even talk about that, Tim, because I think it’s going to play into this. I think it’s kind of like people want to talk about like, “Oh, what do you think about this like stock or this investment or whatever?” I’m like, “I don’t know. Where are you at? Where are you going?” 

So I think the first thing, even before we talk about Social Security, is to take stock of those two things. Where are we at, and where are we going? So like, to me, I think the two biggest things to look at, and Social Security is part of this, is look at your Social Security statement. I’ve done this recently. You can go on to socialsecurity.gov and put in your Social Security number and create an account. It’ll basically pull up your benefits estimate. So like it’ll say – Like for me, if I retire early, like this is the benefit that I get, 2,200 bucks. If I retire at full retirement age, for me, it’s 67, my benefit’s 3,300 bucks. Then if I wait till 70, which you get deferral credits, 4,220. 

[00:18:54] TU: Wow, big difference. 

[00:18:55] TB: Yeah. Socialsecurity.gov is actually pretty – They have some good calculators and like – So it’s pretty decent. So I would say like take stock of where you’re at, which means looking at the Social Security statement, looking at your cash flow statement, i.e. budget, like what’s that look like? Then the big one is the net worth statement. So what are the assets? What are the liabilities? 

From there, I think we have a conversation of like where are we going. I think that’s like when do you want to retire. Some people might be like, “I want to work forever.” Some people are – They’re like, “Now. I want to retire now. I’m 45. I want to retire now.” So I think going through some of those exercises, like I’m a huge proponent of life planning. It’s like changed my life. But actually sitting down – I think so much of the emphasis on retirement is kind of this oasis of like, “I’ve made it. I have some type of financial independence. My calendar is back, and it’s like this destination.” But it’s really more of an ongoing journey of, okay, so you wake up. The retirement party’s over. You just got back from your Hawaii trip to celebrate your retirement. What are you doing? Are you by yourself? Is your spouse still working? Like how are you spending your day? 

So actually write down like what is an ideal schedule. What are the things that are still on your – Things that if you were to die today or tomorrow that you have left undone. What are the things that you’re passionate about? So sometimes, unfortunately, our passions might not necessarily align with like our ability to earn and make money. So sometimes, those things are left for retirement to say, “Hey, I always want to volunteer to do this,” or, “I always wanted to help kids here,” or whatever. 

So I think really having a plan for that. Because to be honest, like the finances are almost – They’re not almost. They are. The finances are secondary. The financial plan in retirement is secondary to like the life plan in retirement because so much of our identity is tied up in our job as director of pharmacy here or pharmacy manager or whatever it is. That it’s hard for us to like wake up one day and be like, “Okay, I’m not that person anymore.” Well, you are that person. You’re just not working in that job anymore. 

But it’s even hard for spouses too because so much of your time is at work, right? So kind of to relearn and do – That’s a real thing. A lot of retirees struggle with addiction, with depression, with kind of like a loss of sense of self and things like that, that I think needs to be addressed. More and more people are talking about this, which is good. So I think like once you get an idea of like, “Hey, where are we at numbers wise and like where are we going life planning-wise,” then I think it’s really important to start getting to things like Social Security and claiming strategies and things like that. 

So to answer your question, Tim, I think that it is one of the most important, if not the most important, decision that you make in building out your retirement plan. Actually, Morningstar did a study that said that – So I think it was based on working with an advisor. It helps you with better decision making can increase your retirement income by 37%. Nine percent of that, which is the highest one, was the Social Security claiming strategy. Of the 37%, 9% of that was that alone. 

You could see, when I rattled off my numbers, 2,200, 3,300, 4,200, that’s a huge difference. For so many people, for a long time, they’ve looked at it as like a breakeven. So they say like, “Okay. If I take 2,200 versus the 3,300, then I have to live to this age to breakeven on what I would be given up.” The problem with that is that the biggest risk that Social Security combats is longevity, meaning that your money doesn’t run out. So if a good chunk of your income is coming from Social Security, which gets cost of living adjustments and never runs out because it’s backed by the full faith and credit of the US government, like that’s huge. 

It really doesn’t matter if you leave some money on the table. But even in most cases, that calculation is typically early 80s for a lot of people. So unless you are thinking that you’re going to live less than that, and you don’t have a spouse because we talked about the spouse gets the higher benefit, then maybe you look at that. But it really needs to be looked at from I think more of an insurance. Like a safety perspective is when you’re looking at that. 

As we said, 78% is basically the amount of your Social Security benefit increases each year from age 62 to 70. So what that means is that every year you defer, you get a 7% increase, a raise in your retirement paycheck. So if you think about that as a working person, if I can lock in seven or eight percent as a raise for eight years, like that’s huge. But for whatever reason, we look at this as like, “If I don’t take this as soon as possible, I’m going to lose out. I’m not going to get the money back.” I think it’s a framing of the decision that we have to relook at. 

So I think the big thing here is like it’s kind of getting away from the water cooler. I think a lot of people claim benefits as soon as possible. I think it’s sometimes greatly influenced by family members, coworkers. It’s the same thing we say with like student loans, where people are like, “Oh, my classmates are doing this.” I’m like, “You’re not your classmates. You have your own financial plan. You do you type of thing.” 

Sources of income in your retirement paycheck do not have an inflation protection as Social Security does. So that’s also hugely important, especially in the times that we’re living in right now. So I think the steps to optimize your claiming strategies, one is to educate yourself. Determine what your benefit is and the implications of claiming at different ages, which means pulling your statement. 

I think that before you even get there, Tim, this is kind of in the get organized of like where are we at. One of the things that you’ll see on your statement is like all of your years. So it looks at 30 years, 35 years, I should know this, of earnings. You can actually say like, “Okay, this is right or this is wrong.” So if you have a beef with what they’re reporting, then you can basically say, “Hey, let me pull my 2008 return.” I can say I actually didn’t make 100,000. I made 150,000, and that will change your benefit. So that’s also a big thing. 

Then take the steps to figure out what is the best solution for you in terms of claiming, and that’s going to be so huge with kind of a jumping off point of how you’re going to build your retirement paycheck.

[00:25:34] TU: Tim, can you read your numbers again? I think those were really powerful. So you gave the early full retirement. I’m looking at mine as well, but they’re skewed a little bit because I worked at universities for a while, where I wasn’t contributing to Social Security, so much lower. But you gave your early number, your full 60 to 67. Then you’re delayed. What were those numbers?

[00:25:52] TB: So my early at 62 is $2,211. If I were to wait until my full retirement age, which for me is 67. Anybody that’s born after 1960, I think, the benefit goes to $3,325.

[00:26:15] TU: So almost a little over 1,000 more. Okay. Then what about 70?

[00:26:18] TB: Then at age 70, the benefit goes to $4,220, and there’s no benefit to defer past that. That’s the range, so again – It’s getting better. People are most – You can see like people are delaying claiming now, which I think it means more people are educated about this. But I think for a majority of the people that are out there – Even if I don’t work, my plan is to not to claim Social Security until and unless barring some unforeseen things, is I’m going to be claiming that 70, and I’m going to collect – Again, this will change between now and then because my earnings will change. 

[00:26:58] TU: Numbers will change. Yup. 

[00:27:00] TB: But you can see the impact is huge. Again, the other thing to remind ourselves is that this is inflation-protected. So at the end of this year, retirees are going to get a major bump in their retirement paychecks because of how inflation has been this year. Whereas if you buy a commercial annuity on the street, so you say, “Hey, I’m going to take $200,000, and it’s going to be paying me a paycheck,” you might get some type of like 2% or 3%, which you’re going to pay a lot of money for. 

[00:27:30] TU: I get 9%, though, when inflation’s up. 

[00:27:32] TB: No, new. So that is off. That’s another thing. Again, it doesn’t really hit home for a lot of pre-retirees or even before that because like the world is your oyster, right? Like when you’re accumulating, you can always earn more money. But like for retirees, especially if they can’t work, which it’s a fixed income, so if you can make a greater percentage of your retirement check Social Security that is inflation-protected, it’s just going to greatly improve your longevity. To mitigate longevity risks in the money running out.

[00:28:12] TU: So in your example, there’s round numbers, about $2,000 difference between your early and your delayed, 62 and 70. So just some rough math. So $2,000 a year, I’m looking at eight years difference between 62 and 70. So basically, if you were to take it at 62, by the time you got to 70, there’d be a little over 16,000, 17,000 dollars that you wouldn’t have otherwise had if you delayed, right?

Now, if you wait and delay till 70 and it’s 2,000 extra per month, you can kind of see the math there of how many years it’ll take to essentially breakeven, right? Now, what we’re not including there is, obviously, the inflation component. Someone could argue, “Hey. Well, there’s an opportunity cost. If you pull money earlier, you could do other things with those.” But again, it goes to really show the difference and how if we’re planning early on, as we’re working on our nest egg kind of coming full circle where you started the series, if we’re planning for a delayed withdrawal from Social Security, well, then we’re going to be able to mitigate that feeling or need at 62 of, “Hey, I’ve got –” Or whatever the age would be for individuals that I got to have this money at this point in time. 

[00:29:21] TB: Wade Pfau, who is the professor of retirement income at the American College of Financial Services, one of the things he stated, because I’m going through a certification for retirement income certified professional, his quote is, “Deferring Social Security is the cheapest annuity money can buy.” So he’s done that study, where from 62 to 70, and then if you take that money and you were buying annuity, like it’s not even close. So you could do it like, hey, if you were to invest this for eight years, but it’s not even close like to basically do a one for one if you were to buy like an annuity on the street. 

That’s the big thing here because, again, if you put the money in the market, if you’re putting into an S&P 500, you’re risking that money, and it goes back to the sequence of returns. If you’re eight years and you needed that money, it’s going to be very, very conservative. You’re not going to be able to get the return. So you’re talking about a seven to eight percent raise for yourself year over year, and that is also inflation-protected, which is huge. 

Again, like one of the things that we should address is that if you’re a 30-year-old or even a 40-year-old, a 20-year-old, and you’re saying, “Social Security, I get it,” it’s going to be there. Social Security, I think, is one of those things, and I hate to say this, but it’s too big to – It’s not going to fail because so many people rely on that as their every day. So there’s a lot of things that says like the trust will be depleted. But you’ll still be able to sustain payouts at a reduced benefit. 

I think that’s what’s going to happen. I think people – I think the Congress is going to be forced to raise like payroll taxes to fund the trust. But I think that we’re also going to either see a step back in benefits in some way or 

[00:31:00] TU: Yeah, combination. Yeah. 

[00:31:02] TB: But at the end of the day, even a reduced version of Social Security is still going to be your best. I’m still going to encourage to – If your retirement paycheck is 1,000 bucks theoretically, I still wanted that to be – If we can get that to be $400, $500, $600, the most of that paycheck needs to come from Social Security because of its safety and the inflation protection.

[00:31:27] TU: Yeah. Again, when you’re working with someone who kind of is helping you build the next egg, you can run it with it. You can run it without it. You can run it in a middle ground, to your point. So maybe it’s not the full benefit or numbers we’re seeing there, but we think it’s a reduced amount and kind of see how you feel with what shakes out in terms of whether you’re on track or not and what you need to do.

[00:31:47] TB: Well, one last point to make about Social Security is really looking at this as an insurance decision versus like an investment decision. So typically, like wealthier people or people that don’t necessarily look at or need Social Security, they look at it more as like, “Okay, how do I get the most out of my money?” Most of the times, they’re going to defer. But for a lot of people that are really relying on this to make sure that their retirement paycheck is sustained for at least 30 years or their lifetime, it needs to be looked at as an insurance decision. 

If you look at the different risks like longevity risk, which is the risk of your money running out, the larger – This is a larger stream of lifetime inflation-protected risk. Like that’s important. Long-term care risk, so you have like more resources later than life. So if you’re getting a bigger paycheck, so if I’m getting 4,200 at 70, versus if I would have taken the 2,200 at 62, that means I have to deplete my portfolio more later. Inflation. We talked about the larger percentage that’s protected by inflation. 

The other big thing is reality risk. Like as you get older, if a majority of your paycheck is just coming straight from the government, it simplifies decision making. You’re also less at risk for like elder financial risk, which is you want to have a greater stream of income. It’s more about income streams versus assets. You have less opportunity for people to defraud you. Unfortunately, like financial advisors are top. They’re not top of the list. Actually, family members are at the top of the list for that. 

But the big thing is like excess withdrawals. So like if your greater paycheck is coming from Social Security, you don’t necessarily are going to deplete your assets faster. Eliminate some market risk because, again, you’re not relying on your assets as much. Then that whole risk of like early loss of spouse, deferring that larger benefit that then your survivor would get. 

So in the case of like, Shea, let’s say Shea has a benefit that’s $2,800, and I claim it 2,200 because I feel like I’m going to, I’m going to pass away early, that’s a big mistake because she is stuck with her $2,800 because my 2,200 is less, whereas if I were to defer and say, “At 70, I’m collecting 4,200.” Then even if I die at 78, she gets the 4,200, and then 2,800 goes away. Those are some of the things that we’re talking about in practice. It just makes sense to really look at this closely before kind of just doing whatever your coworker is doing.

[00:34:14] TU: Great stuff, Tim. We’re going to come back to this topic more. We’ve touched on it here. We talked about it previously in episode 242. But, man, there’s so many layers of Social Security to consider, and I think regardless of where someone is at in their career journey, an important topic and part of the financial planning that probably doesn’t get enough attention. Or it maybe just prematurely gets kind of ruled out, especially for folks that are early on in their journey. 

Let’s wrap up this series and this episode by talking about at a high level the three approaches to building your retirement paycheck. I love when you talk on this topic because I think we’re starting to get a little bit more granular on how are we actually going to build this retirement paycheck. How are we going to produce this income? We all are familiar with the W2 income, the paycheck we get it once or twice a month. Now, we’ve got to find a way to build that same type of paycheck in retirement. 

So Tim, walk us through three approaches, certainly not the only ones that are out there, but three approaches to building the retirement paycheck.

[00:35:11] TB: Yeah. So the three are going to be the flooring strategy, the bucket strategy, and the systemic withdrawal strategy. So to start with the flooring strategy, so it’s probably going to be the most conservative approach of the three. Critics of this approach will say like, “I don’t want to survive. I want to thrive.” But what the flooring strategy does is it builds an income floor to meet essential expenses with things like Social Security or like an annuity. So the essential expenses might be housing, food, gas, utilities, medical expenses, insurance, maybe debt. 

So that is basically – If we determine that those expenses are, say, $5,500 a month, and we know that Social Security is going to pay us, say, 3,500, then we need to buy, essentially, like an annuity. So think of an annuity as like a private Social Security. So you give an insurance company a sum of money, and then they’re going to pay that back. Usually, it can be for a term certain, but it’s usually for the rest of your life. So you would buy a stream of income to make up the rest of that floor. So that if something were to happen, you always have the essentials met. 

Then the discretionary expenses, there are things like travel and gifts and dining out and entertainment and hobbies, are then basically funded by the portfolio. So you have $2,000 a month of discretionary. Then that money would basically come from the portfolio or could come from like part-time work or something like that. So the flooring strategy is for those that are very conservative, and they want to ensure that for as long as they are alive, they have money to basically keep the lights on and feed themselves. What that typically takes, which is hard for a lot of people, is parting with potentially a good chunk of your income. 

If we use this example, and I don’t know what it would take to get $2,000 worth of income, but say you have a million-dollar portfolio, and you get $2,000 worth of income based on your age, your gender, maybe to part ways with $300,000 or let’s say $300,000 that all of a sudden, you wake up one day, and you have the income stream. But your million-dollar portfolio is now $700,000 that you’re now drawn on for those discretionary expenses. Now –

[00:37:28] TU: You’re trading some of that nest egg for an income stream. Yeah. 

[00:37:32] TB: Exactly. Now, psychologically, they say that that’s tough to get over that hump. But it’s a lot better to do that, versus someone who is in a systematic withdrawal strategy. We will talk about it. That’s drawn down every year. Their portfolio is going down and down and down most years. So just to have that paycheck coming in is from a mental perspective good. 

Now, the bucket strategy is essentially where you set up separate pools of investments with the lowest risk investments in the near term time horizon or segment. Then you have like a middle bucket and then a longer term horizon bucket. The idea is that you would say, okay, bucket one is going to be funded with X amount of dollars, and it will say it’s like five years of spending. So it might have $250,000 in there that is going to be super conservative, and that’s going to be with cash, things like tips, which are inflation-protected bonds, a bond ladder, whichever year creates some type of income for you. 

Then the medium term bucket is going to be more moderate. So that might be for like a 6 to 15-year time horizon, and that could be in like income stocks or like utility stocks and maybe some bonds. Then you have a 15-plus year bucket. That might be the balance of your portfolio that’s more aggressive. So that’s going to be more growth stocks and things like that. The idea is that once the first segment is depleted, so that zero to five-year bucket, that $250 is spent over five years, then the bucket two kind of replenishes bucket one, and then bucket three kind of replenishes bucket two. There’s lots of different rules that you can put into place of how you do that. 

From a conceptual perspective, one of the advantages of this is that clients are like, “Okay, I get this,” and like, “All I’m really worried about is like do I have enough money in bucket one,” and knowing that, although like the market can be crazy, and bucket three is not good right now, I’m not going to touch that for another 15 years. So it’s a way to kind of bucket or segment different money for different purposes. This is one that a lot of advisors use. 

Probably the predominant one is the last one, is systemic withdrawal strategy. So this is based on essentially the work of William Bengen, who researched the all 30-year time periods, and he gets the 4% rule. So the idea here is that you look at your portfolio balance. You look at like what the market – How the portfolio performed and then inflation. Then you essentially – Like if you start the first year and you say, “Okay, it’s a million dollars,” and you get $40,000. Then that year, the market returns 6%, and inflation was 2.9%. Based on those inputs, you then adjust the paycheck, the $40,000 for the next year. 

So you might say when the market is up and inflation is moderate, then you basically give yourself a raise with maybe some caps. If the market is down and inflation is such, maybe you freeze it. Or maybe you actually reduce spending. So it’s a very rule-based way to kind of use the 4% rule as a guide. But to work dynamically year to year with the portfolio and with the market factors that are inflation and those types of things, to make sure that year to year, you’re given the client a paycheck that is sustainable for the longevity of the retirement period. 

Again, there’s a million different ways to kind of skin this as well. But the idea is that you’re working more dynamically with market forces, and it’s based loosely on the 4%. Now, a lot of researchers have said that like the 4% rule won’t necessarily hold up in the future because of when that was done, you have low inflation and really high equity valuations. So that’s important to take note of. Although he did his research, it’s not necessarily indicative of what’s going to happen in the future. 

So you have the flooring strategy, you have the bucket strategy, and then you have the systemic withdrawal strategy, are kind of different approaches on how to build out their retirement paycheck on a year-to-year basis.

[00:41:35] TU: Tim, great stuff. I’m just reflecting on the journey we’ve come over the last four episodes, and we’re going to dive into all of these topics in further detail on future shows. We’re going to be doing webinars. We’re going to have blog posts. Make sure to check out information at yourfinancialpharmacist.com. 

We understand the needs that are out there around retirement planning, wherever someone is at on their financial journey, a new practitioner midcareer, pre-retiree, or those that are even in retirement. So whether you have yet to work with a planner, and this is an opportunity to do so or perhaps you’re working with a planter but are wondering what might else be out there and interested in a second opinion, we’d love to have an opportunity to talk with you in terms of learning more about the one-on-one comprehensive financial planning services that are offered by the team at YFP Planning. 

We’ve got five certified financial planners and in-house tax team. That includes a CPA and an IRS enrolled agent, soon to be two IRS enrolled agents. So we’d love an opportunity to learn more about your financial goals, learn more about your situation, and determine whether or not those planning services are a good fit for you. 

You can learn more and book a free discovery call at yfpplanning.com. Again, that’s yfpplanning.com. Thanks so much for listening to this series, and we hope you have a great rest of your day. 

[END OF INTERVIEW]

[00:42:47] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. 

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts, and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of Your Financial Pharmacist, unless otherwise noted, and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward-looking statements that are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. 

Thank you, again, for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week. 

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 274: Risk Tolerance vs Risk Capacity (Retirement Planning)


Risk Tolerance vs Risk Capacity (Retirement Planning)

In part three of the four-part series on retirement planning, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, and Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP®, explain why it’s critical to evaluate how much risk you are able to stomach versus how much risk you should take to achieve your long-term savings goal and considerations for setting asset allocation in alignment with your risk capacity. 

Episode Summary

YFP Co-founders Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, and Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP®,  explain the difference between risk tolerance and risk capacity in this episode, the third part of the four-part series on retirement planning. Tim and Tim explain why it’s critical to evaluate how much risk you can stomach versus how much risk you should take to achieve your long-term savings goal, and considerations for setting asset allocation in alignment with your risk capacity. Tim and Tim break down some strategies to employ when your risk tolerance and capacity are not in alignment. They connect the topic of the retirement nest egg to asset allocation. What we determine we need for the nest egg, combined with risk tolerance or risk capacity, will guide asset allocation. Tim Baker shares the value of a financial planner as an objective third-party in making retirement planning decisions, explains how preconceived notions about money impact the financial plan, and mentions early and ongoing financial literacy to increase risk tolerance. The five to ten years leading up to retirement can be a period of uncertainty, and Tim and Tim explain the sequence of returns risk during that time frame. They close with a reminder to revisit asset allocation percentages over time to maintain the amount of risk initially planned.

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRODUCTION]

[00:00:00] TU: Hey everybody, Tim Ulbrich here and thank you for listening to The YFP Podcast, where each week, we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. 

On this week’s episode, Tim Baker and I continue our four-part retirement planning series by discussing the difference between risk tolerance and risk capacity, and how this impacts your asset allocation plan. Highlights from the show include why it’s critical to evaluate how much risk you’re able to stomach, versus how much risk you should take to achieve your long-term goals. discussing strategies to employ when your risk tolerance and your risk capacity don’t jive and some considerations when setting your asset allocation plan to be in alignment with your risk capacity.

Before we jump into the show, I recognize that many listeners may not be aware of what the team at YFP Planning does in working one on one with more than 270 households in 40 plus states. YFP planning offers fee only, high-touch financial planning that is customized to the pharmacy professional.

If you’re interested in learning more about how working one on one with a certified financial planner, may help you achieve your financial goals, you can book a free discovery call by visiting yfpplanning.com. Whether or not YFP Planning’s financial planning services are a good fit for you, know that we appreciate your support of this podcast and our mission on how pharmacists achieve financial freedom.

Okay, let’s jump into my conversation with certified financial planner, Tim Baker.

[INTEVIEW]

[00:01:25] TU: Welcome everyone to this week’s episode of the YFP, podcast excited to have Tim Baker alongside me again as we continue our four-part series on retirement planning. On Episode 272, just two weeks ago, we talked about determining how much is enough when you’re saving for retirement. Last week, episode 273, we talked about the alphabet soup of retirement accounts with a focus on those tax advantaged accounts. In this episode, we’re going to focus and dive into further on how to differentiate risk tolerance versus risk capacity, which ultimately leads to how the funds are going to be allocated within your various accounts as you’re putting together your savings strategy, also known as asset allocation.

So, Tim Baker, let’s start with why this topic matters and the connection to the nest egg ultimately, that folks may need to take just about the risks they think two or perhaps even more or less.

[00:02:18] TB: Yeah, I think this is one of the probably the most important concepts to understand. Because I think once you understand it, it’s kind of the easiest thing to adapt to better improve your financial situation, especially for like long term investment for the sake of retirement. So, I think a lot of people leave a lot of meat on the bone with regard to opportunity to improve their financial planning, because they either lack the experience or they don’t understand it, or it’s scary. But I think understanding this concept between what your risk tolerance is and what your risk capacity is, and then adapting that to your portfolio is huge. Again, we’ll kind of talk about conservative Jane versus aggressive Jane and really, all of the factors that are involved in that. One of the easiest ones to kind of change your dial up has to do with risk and ultimately, your asset allocation, which we’ll get into today.

[00:03:08] TU: Yeah, and I think this is a topic, Tim, where like, just being honest with yourself and having some self-awareness on how do I feel about the risk that I’m taking. Obviously, we’re going to talk about the importance of putting that alongside of your goals, do those jive, do they not jive. And I think this is really where the value of a third party can come in as well, when you’re looking at whether it’s one individuals, two individuals doing the financial plan, but often we might need to be both pushed and or held accountable. Obviously, an objective third party can play a really valuable role there.

So, I think we’ve all been told before, at some point or another that, hey, we’ve got to take some risk, if we’re willing to achieve, those big lofty, long term goals that we have. We talked about in episode 272, we need this big number 2, 3, 4 or $5 million, that seems way off into the distance, or perhaps for folks that are a little bit closer to that, not so far off in the distance. But regardless, it can feel overwhelming. And so, we’ve got to take some risk to get to that goal. But I don’t think we often differentiate this concept of risk tolerance versus risk capacity. So, Tim, let’s start there, break these two down in terms of definition of tolerance versus capacity.

[00:04:16] TB: Yeah, the tolerance is what we’ll start with, and this is typically the one that most people understand and know about. When I think of risk tolerance, I think of like the questionnaire. So, probably a buyer’s perspective, one of the things that we need to do to make sure that we’re doing our due diligence with a client is to ask them some questions about their experience, their outlook on the market, their understanding of how stocks and bonds work. If x loss, how they would feel about x loss or x gain and what their actions would be.

So, it’s really based on a questionnaire. From the advisor perspective, it’s really based on what we think the client can handle in a down-market. So, we’re trying to build out the best, and again, what we’re trying to do here, ultimately, is to get the best possible return for the least amount of risk, and that’s what asset allocation is. So, from the investor’s perspective, or in our case, the advisor or the client’s perspective, it’s the amount of risk that you want to take. It’s more of an emotional thing.

To me, that is basically the starting point for the conversation at least. And there are a lot of ways to get about, like what your risk tolerance are. So, one of them is kind of the rule of thumb, and I think I misspoke on a couple episodes back when we talked about this, because I think they’ve actually adapted it, the general rule of thumb. So, the general rule of thumb is that, to get your risk tolerance, you take 110, and then you subtract out your age, and then that gives you the amount of stocks or equities that should be in your portfolio.

So, if you’re 30 years old, 110 minus 30, you should have an 80% of your portfolio in stocks, or equities, and then the remaining 20% in fixed income or bonds. I think that that is a terrible rule of thumb myself. I think that’s a rule of thumb that doesn’t like necessarily hold up. But it’s what a lot of people use to kind of get started. The other way is to kind of go actually go through like a risk questionnaire, and I know Vanguard is one that – you can do that for free, go to their website and basically answer a few questions and it says, “Voila, you are 60/40, or you’re 70/30”, whatever that is. And I would actually start there before using any rule of thumb.

So again, the risk tolerance team is basically what we think you can handle on a down-market, or what you think as a client, you want to take. It’s more of an emotional thing.

If we shift over to risk capacity, this, from an advisor perspective is based on what you can actually handle on a down-market. So, this is actually using some numbers and looking at time horizon, and things like that. So, from your perspective or the investor’s perspective, it’s how much risk you should take. It’s more objective, and factors, and savings rate, goals, time horizons, think things like that. Again, it goes back to that amount of the risk that you can handle.

To give you an example of a risk capacity, versus risk tolerance, say we’re both 40-year-old pharmacists, and me close closer to you, and I’m not a pharmacist. Say, we’re just –

[00:07:23] TU: Coming up. It’s coming up.

[00:07:24] TB: So, if we both take a questionnaire, you could take that questionnaire and be a very savvy investor, have read up on the topic, and you can come back with a very, say, aggressive allocation for where you need to be. And I could do the same thing and come back very, very conservative. So, I could be a 50/50, you could be a 90/10. That’s risk tolerance, is basically based on our inputs in a questionnaire. For risk capacity, it does have to do with the individual itself, but it’s really about, I think, kind of where you’re at in life as well. So, in the same breath, if we’re both 40 years old, and we have 25 years left in the workforce, and we both kind of have the similar amount saved or earning potential, our risk capacity is so much higher than, say, my risk tolerance because I’m scared of the market, because I just have a longer time horizon.

So, where risk capacity is typically the lowest is right at the point of retirement. Because that is typically your longest time horizon, where you have a fixed dollar amount, i.e. your nest egg to work with. So, you just don’t have a lot of room capacity to take a lot of risk. You have to be somewhat conservative. Whereas if you have a longer time horizon, you have good earnings, a good savings, your capacity is a lot, a lot more. Maybe a convoluted way to say it, but to recap, tolerance is kind of like what you feel or like what you want to take. Risk capacity is what you can or what you should take. One of the things that often happens in this, is that those two things are not often equal. So, what we do as a third party is kind of have a conversation about this, and educate a client and sometimes that is over years, because sometimes they’ll say like, “Hey, Tim, I understand what you’re saying, but I just want to be safer.” I’ll say, “Okay, I’m going to bug you about this again.” The next time it’s like, “All right, well, my head didn’t fall off when the market went down 20%. It’s doing what it’s doing. Maybe I’ll be a little bit more aggressive.” And I think that is all the difference when it comes to long-term investing, is making sure that you are – again, you keep expenses low. We’ve talked about that numerous times with regard to your investment portfolio, but your asset allocation, which is based on your risk tolerance, and your risk capacity is set where it needs to be and then the big proponent of that.

[00:10:00] TU: Yeah, this is Tim, where I think the rubber meets the road of what we started this series on, with the nest egg calculation and looking at how much is enough, right? Because you and I could punch numbers in a calculator, or like, “Great, we need 4.2 million 3.7”, whatever the number is, but then we start to get a layer deeper. We talked about the tax advantaged accounts of how we might get there. But the next layer of which we’re getting into today is really that how are we going to invest within these types of accounts, which is the asset allocation. Which, as you just mentioned, comes down to, ultimately our risk capacity and the potential friction that may or may not be there with the risk tolerance.

So, I think that my question here, let’s lean into that situation where there’s a disconnect, where there’s a rub, where I understand what you’re saying, risk tolerance is what I’m able to stomach, risk capacity is maybe what I need to be able to do to get to that nest egg number. So, let’s say I punch in my numbers in the nest egg, they come out at $4.2 million, but then I realized, like, based on the rate of return and the level of aggressiveness that, those numbers are determined upon. I’m not comfortable with that. So, play that out. Is that a scenario where, as you just mentioned, we’re kind of working towards this and getting more comfortable in the long run? Is it adjusting down that nest egg goal? How do you begin to work through this with a client?

[00:11:20] TB: Yeah. The nest egg is a multivariate problem. So, the two defaults that I would always go to is like, if you’re not comfortable with taking more risk, and again, I would say, investing is definitely risky. Of course, it is. But what I would say over a 20 plus year time horizon is actually fairly predictable. We have enough data points that says that the US market, and again, there’s not necessarily any – it’s not past performances are indicative of future performance. But I think we’re not gambling here, we’re not speculating.

So, we’re not taking a bet all on like one stock. But I think if you’re uncomfortable with that, I think, the second thing I would say, is you have to save more though, you have to invest more. When we talked about conservative Jane versus aggressive Jane, and we kind of said, “Hey, conservative Jane, she makes $120,000. She gets 3% cost of Living raises, she saves 10%. She has a 30-year career. And then this is her nest egg.” What’s your income? What’s your cost to live? What do you actually save? And then the time horizon, 30 years. So, the other thing that you could say is like, “Okay, well, maybe we’re not retiring at 65 in 30 years. Maybe we’re retiring at 70.” So, it’s a 35-year career. And that’s the thing is like, you can always work longer. 

One of these things have to give, and that’s why I say like, the easiest thing for me, is to say like, “Look, if you’re 30, 35, 40, even 45, and you have 20 years, left until retirement, who gives a crap if the market goes down in 2022?” But, we as humans, we feel that loss, we’re like, “Man, my portfolio was $200,000 or $20,000, and now it’s $140,000 or $14,000.” You feel those losses. But again, this goes back to like what I was saying, it’s hard for us to conceptualize time, and when the market went down during the pandemic, I don’t even think about that and a lot of people freak out about that. But we know that the market is going to do this, and this is like on a podcast, I’m just waving my hand up and down like a roller coaster. But typically, it’s going in a positive trajectory. You’re just going to have some of those ups and downs.

What I would say is that, if you can stomach those ups and downs and lean more towards equities, you’re going to be better off. I think what people do is they put more bonds or fixed income in their portfolio, to smooth out those rides, even those rides are still the same. But what they do is they make themselves feel better in the near term, at the behest of like long-term performance.

So, on the other side of this, Tim, is like, if we’re talking to the pre-retiree, the person that’s going to retire in the next five years, sometimes you look at that portfolio, and it’s looking at him like, “Whoa, we’re taking way too much risk.” Because if the market does go down 40%, then we don’t have enough time to recover from that. So, it’s really indicative to like, say, “Hey, I’m glad you took risks throughout your working career. But now we got to start protecting the principal.” And this is where you probably want to be the most conservative with your portfolios is kind of that right in the eye of the storm, which is 5 to 10 years plus or minus, your retirement date. And people get that wrong, too. That’s where you almost – you’re at risk for like sequence of return risk, which means that if the market is down, say 20%, 30%, 40%, and then you’re taking 40 or 50 grand out of your portfolio to live on, the failure rate, meaning you’re going to run out of money is so much higher than anything that you could be doing leading up to that.

So, it’s really, really important to know where you are in space and time, and ensure that your portfolio is positioned in a way that’s going to, one, get the best returns, but also protect you. For a lot of us, it’s kind of not knowing. And I would say it’s one of the major missteps that I see, looking at people’s portfolios is a misalignment of that.

[00:15:31] TU: Yeah. Tim, one of the things I’m sensing, at least anecdotally, and talking with pharmacists, about this in various settings, is that the mid-career pharmacist, so I’m thinking about the group that is maybe 10 to 25 years into their career, they’re not yet feeling the retirement date right around the corner, but they’re certainly past kind of the early part of their career. I think there’s a real risk here, as you highlighted. Some of the limitations of the rule of thumb, to get too conservative too early. And I think, in this moment, we’re in a period of volatility right now in the markets. And depending on when people graduated and started investing, this might be the real first significant downturn that they’re feeling in the market, right? You look at even some of the start of the pandemic. That was very short lived. It was significant, to drop. But it was pretty abrupt and recovered quickly.

So, I think this is really – I graduated in 2008. I’ve talked about this on the show before. This is the real first test for me in my portfolio to say, “All right, am I really adhering to my asset allocation plan and what I need to be doing, and the rub potentially the tolerance capacity.” And I think it’s different than a new practitioner, because you have worked hard for 10 or 15 years, you have built up several $100,000 or more of savings, and you’re looking at this saying, “Man, this hurts in the moment.” But if we’re looking 20, 30 years into the future, as you said, over and over again on the show, the worst thing we can do is buy high and sell low. So, the third party here, I think, it’d be really helpful making sure we have a plan to kind of weather the storms. But I specifically am thinking about that mid-career group right now, in this period we’re in of volatility, and they’ve done hard work, they’ve built up some savings, and this might be the first test, of that happening.

[00:17:12] TB: Yeah, I mean, and when those numbers get bigger, you feel that even more, right? I’m human. When I do catch a glance at my portfolio, I’m like, “Oh, is this really?” But I had to step back and look at the long term. I almost have to like detach myself emotionally from it. Because what happens, and I say this all the time is like, when the market just does this, and it’s just a downward plunge, your first reaction is you want to take your investment ball and go home. You don’t want to play anymore. Oftentimes I say, is like, you want to do the exact opposite of how you feel. So, that’s when I reassure myself and I say, “Hey, Tim, you know what, you are putting in x amount of dollars into your 401(k) at every pay period. And now, what you’re buying with those dollars is going. It sets the dollar cost averaging.” So, when it’s up, I’m not buying as many shares, but I’m still like, patting myself on the back, because I’m like, “Yeah, my portfolio is up.” But when it’s down, I have to basically say, “Look, if I’m putting money into my portfolio systematically, on a recurrent basis, which is typically what people do in their 401(k), your dollars are just going farther.” So, then when it does rebound, you’re going to see that impact even more.

So, it is one of those things where it’s, again, it’s not getting caught up in the moment, and it is really looking at the long term. But when you hear the news, or you hear other people talking and there are things that – it gives you pause, and you start to doubt yourself. But I think at the end of the day, what I always say to myself is like I trust the market. I trust what the data has showed. Again, maybe it’s not always going to be 10% when you just sit down for inflation, it’s 6.87%. But always not be that. And sometimes people go to the catastrophic thing. I’m like, “Then we have other problems to worry about, if that’s the case.”

I really believe that, if you look at all this all the things, whether it’s you can make more money, and then potentially save more or you can work longer. To me, the easiest thing to do is to kind of like surrender yourself to the market and say, “Look” – to your point, Tim, like the rule of thumb, it’s this gradual, and I have – I’ll share the camera here, which I’ll be on the video, but this is like a really terrible sketch. Because I was trying to like sketch this out conceptually, because I’ve never showed this. I’m a visual learner. In the rule of thumb, it has you go in and say like, “Okay, if you’re 30, then how do you start in 80% equities?” And then when you go to 40, you’re at 70%. In my mind, I’m like, “No.” Hell to the no. Because it’s just so much lost opportunity.

Whereas mine is more like, my belief and this is more of a capacity thing, is more of a cliff. So, you should be very much mostly equities, and there’s a lot of criticism against an equity portfolio. And again, this is not investment advice. This is not investment advice. But it should be typically closer to the equity or equity portfolio. And then when you get close to that eye of the storm, that’s when you start to basically divest out of equities, and go more to the fixed income, the bonds, and then you go through that eye of the storm where you’re here, and then you start to gradually, as you get to 75, 80, and you’re really looking for combating its longevity risk, which is the fear of the money running out. You need that to last into your 90s, 100, that type of thing. So, you’re going to take more risks on the back end, but typically, you have a more of a handle on spending, and things like that, post eye of the storm time.

So yeah, I mean, no matter where you’re at in life, this is an important conversation to have. And there is no right answer. But I would say that there are wrong answers in my estimation. But I also think it’s important to say that, at the end of the day, we say this about student loans, but at the end of the day, if you’re like waking up and you’re like sweating bullets, because you’re worried about how your investments are faring, especially in a volatile market, then we talk about this with the emergency fund, it’s just not worth that.

[00:21:20] TU: But, something’s got to give.

[00:21:21] TB: Something’s got to give. That means you either have to save more or work longer, and there’s a lot of –

[00:21:27] TU: Spend less.

[00:21:28] TB: Spend less, yeah, which, which is really hard. That’s the one I didn’t mention, because that’s really, really hard to do, for most people. And I think I said on a previous episode, some people look at a 60% to 80% of their income, and that’s basically what they need is. Some advisors just look at what the tax return says, and if you’ve earned $180,000, leading up to retirement, that’s what they plan for, because that’s basically the money that’s flowing through. So, there’s lots of different ways to kind of look at that as well.

[00:21:59] TU: Tim, I think one of the interesting things here is for folks, again, I mentioned the self-awareness thing. I think they really dig deeper about like, where might these beliefs come from. Wherever you are, on kind of the risk tolerance, what you’re able to stomach scale. You mentioned earlier in the show, some folks might be like, “Hey, I’m scared of market. I’ve heard that multiple times. I have no interest kind of investing in the market. Don’t trust it. Not comfortable with the risk, whatever the case may be.” And then there’s obviously the other end of the spectrum, which is like, I’m all in on whatever investment strategy could be equities, could be cryptocurrency, could be real estate, could be a combination of things. I don’t even feel the risk. It’s like, “Man, you could have two people at the same point in their journey, and are just dichotomously in very, very different directions.”

I’m just curious from your life experiences working with clients, is that coming from some of the money scripts and things that were growing up in? Is that coming from experiences like, “Hey, I lived through the 2008 recession. I saw my parents lose a significant amount of their nest egg or grandparent”, whatever be the case. Obviously, the pandemic could have an impact. Where does that come from?

[00:23:13] TB: I think it’s a combination of all those things. I mean, you even look at it, the Great Depression, that generation didn’t put money in banks, because they just didn’t trust banks, and then that can kind of filter through later generations. I think it’s a combination of, kind of your – I think your upbringing, like I would – I talked to my parents, and they’re older now, but even when younger, I think, my mom opened up a Roth IRA for me when I was really, really young, but I think it was like, mainly in cash, or like, very, very conservative bonds, or something like that, that we actually invested in which , again, doesn’t really make any sense if it’s going to be used for 14-year-old in retirement, 50 years later or 60 years later.

So, I think it is a lack of understanding and kind of, I think, a lack of education, or financial literacy around investments is part of it. That’s not anyone’s fault. I just think it should be more part of the curriculum and the things that we talk about as students in grade school, in high school. And again, we kind of talked about you can take out hundreds of thousands of loans, but not really not understand like the financial implications of that. So, I think we need to do a better job of that. I think, again, to go back to my own experience, Tim, we didn’t talk about money growing up. It was very much a taboo thing. So, it was kind of just something that was hands off, which I think kind of does lead to stunted growth in that regard. I think that a more openness to kind of talk through some of these things, and some of like the head trash, I think, a lot of it goes – it does come from your experience. I think there is a curiosity for a lot of people and we see it, where we kind of talked about maybe some missed prioritization of like, you’re invested in penny stocks or individual stocks, but you’re not necessarily taking your match for 401(k) or you have zero emergency fund.

I don’t hate on that too much, because I think it’s someone’s willingness to kind of learn and understand, like how markets work, right? I’ve been in that boat. But I think over time is like, the market is very, very humbling, where you – it’s almost like going to the casino. No one ever says, like, “Oh, man, I lost all this money.” It was like, “I had a great” – those things get lost in the fold. I think that over time, I think people’s experience with the market is, even professional. I just read a headline somewhere that Warren Buffett says, like a monkey could pick stocks better than most financial advisors, which I would agree with. Because there is a lot of randomness with that. So, it’s, again, buy the market, don’t try to beat the market.

I think it’s a little bit of that. It’s experience, it’s education. So, people that are nerds about this, that read up, I think kind of understand what to do. But I think a lot of it is the fingerprints of what our families put on us, and sometimes those things are overcomeable, and we are aware of those things, and sometimes they’re not. Sometimes it takes someone to say, “Maybe we need to look at this a different way.” Because if you want to get to where you need to go, and for a lot of pharmacists, especially if they’re a lot of pharmacists out there, they might be the first person in their family to have graduated from college. They might be the first person that make a six-figure income.

So, with that, comes, I think, a different set of issues and things to think about as you’re – because, again, typically, the higher you are on the income scale, we look at like Social Security, less of your retirement paycheck is coming for security. The lower you are on the income, the majority of your paycheck is going to come from security. So, you just have a different set of issues and things to think about, as you make more money and have that paycheck. So, I think it’s all of those things that can shape your money script, the things that you’re saying to yourself, but I think it also is even deeper than that. It’s kind of the caveman, cavewoman approaches like you don’t want losses, right? So, you want to protect yourself in any way that you can to shield yourself from those losses. So, we do sometimes irrational things just to protect that pain. I think that’s just in our DNA. We’re here today because our ancestors have survived, some didn’t. But as the evolution of sorts is that you are programmed to do things that maybe don’t necessarily make sense in here now.

[00:27:45] TU: Tim, that’s so true. I think it’s human behaviors, you mentioned. But as you’re talking, I can and always will, I think vividly remember the significant losses in my portfolio. You feel more in the moment, but I don’t remember the significant gains in my portfolio. The long-term trend is up in a positive direction, and the significant ups have been bigger than or equal to some of the significant downs. But I don’t remember those. Like I do the losses.

Let’s wrap up this third part of our retirement planning series by connecting all of this to the asset allocation plan. So, what we determined we need is the nest egg. We talked about that in the first episode. What our risk tolerance or capacity is, those two things combined is going to then help us inform what our asset allocation plan is. So, how we actually are going to distribute these dollars within the accounts, the various alphabet soup of accounts we talked about in the last episode. So, what is asset allocation, Tim? Just to find that a little bit further, and then what are the main variables. We’ve obviously talked about one in terms of the risk, but other variables that can impact our asset allocation plan?

[00:28:51] TB: Yeah, so the asset allocation is basically the art, or you can say, even the science of construction of portfolio with a mix of stocks and bonds to achieve the most amount of return for the least amount of risk. That’s what you’re really trying to do. So, at a very strategic level, there’s basically two buckets or two asset classes. There are stocks, which are basically where you own an equity share and a company, and you’re afforded things like dividends and capital appreciation. These are the things that we need to outpace things like the inflation monster, the tax man, et cetera. And then the second part of the portfolio are bonds or fixed incomes, and these are typically IOUs or notes that say, “Hey, government, I’m going to lend you the money.” Or, “Hey, corporation, I’m going to lend you my money. Give it back to me sometime in the future, but give me an interest payment as we go.”

Between the two, typically, bonds are more like a linear growth. Stocks are more exponential growth, but there’s typically more risk with stocks and less versus with bonds. That’s asset allocation in a nutshell. And then what you could do is, you can kind of go more granular in terms of like, “Okay, well, if I have this” – if 80% of my portfolio is going to equities or stocks, you can divide that up between things like large cap, mid cap, small cap, international, emerging market, real estate, that type of thing. And then same thing with bonds, if 20% of your portfolio is going to bonds, you can divide that up between junk bonds or international bonds or short duration bonds, long duration bonds, government bonds, that type of thing.

So, it is more granular. But at a very high level, to tie risk to asset allocation is, either using the rule of thumb, or using some type of risk tolerance, gauge or questionnaire, you can say, “Okay, I’m going to answer these questions. It’s going to say I’m an 80/20 portfolio, maybe a more balanced 60/40 portfolio.” And with that, if you have kind of an unexamined, approach, meaning like, most of the time, I think a lot of people will take that, and that’s how they invest. And I think, what we, as an advisor would do is say, let’s say, “I’m you’re 35, I know what saying you’re at an 80/20. But here are some numbers to show you that you should probably should be more aggressive.” We’re not going to spend this portfolio for another 30 years. Who cares what it does for the next 20, for the next 10, whatever that is. But let’s take a little bit more aggressive. 

So, that’s where you kind of get that talk about risk capacity. And then what you do is say you say, “Okay, we’ll compromise. We’re going to like a 90/10.” Then essentially, if you have $100,000, we’ll just say you’re a government employee with a TSP, if you have 100,000, know that 90,000 is going to go into some type of equity portfolio. So, the big one in TSP would be the C fund, which mimics the S&P 500. And then 10%, would go into the bond fund. That’s basically it. That’s where you connect the risk of where you’re at which again, is partly derived from the things that we just talked about, your upbringing, the head trash that you have, your experience. If you’ve experienced any pain, et cetera. And then, it should be then examined from where you’re at in terms of your time horizon, what you have saved. You’re working with an advisor, obviously. If you don’t have experience, you have a little bit more cred there to come up with, you know, what your final number is for your asset allocation. And then you put that into practice.

And then the idea is that over the course of a year, five years, 10 years, that portfolio is going to drift. So, say you are at 90/10, it could drift to a 95/5. It could drift down to an 80/20 or an 85/15, and you really want to make sure that you rebalance that over time. Because if you don’t, then if you’re an 80/20 portfolio, and you drift to something like a 90/10, if the market was then to go into a spiral, you’re taking more risk than what you signed up initially. So, sometimes when I say to rebalance, it just means to basically lock your percentages back to what you originally had agreed upon with your advisor or with yourself. That’s the big thing. So, you are kind of just resetting the percentages.

[00:33:12] TU: Again, this is a really important connection, as we bring this all together and talk about the value of a third party and the value of a planner that can really help your –it’s not – the value is not coming from picking stocks or picking investments that are going to beat the market. We’ve established that, what you’re describing is more passive investing strategy and here, we’re just talking about investing, which again, is just one part of the financial plan. The value really comes from okay, what is the game plan? What is the life plan? What is a wealthy life look like now? What is retirement life look like? What’s the number for us to get there? What does that mean today? How much do we need to be saving today to get there? We talked about that, in the first part of the series. What accounts are we going to leverage? How do we optimize this tax strategy? And within there, how do we begin to pick the investments, rebalance those portfolios over time.

Again, just such an important reminder, there are a lot of nuances in there alone, but investing is one part of the financial plan. So, we need to take that step back out of this silo that we’re in retirement planning and say, “Okay, what else is going on? What are all the other aspects of the financial plan that are happening? And does that impact or does that change potentially how we’re going to approach our investing plan?” I think, sometimes, we can hear this and hear the passive investing strategy. We can hear the nest egg calculators and think like, I can do that, I’ll just rebalance every once in a while. And you certainly can do it yourself. But let’s not lose sight of what can happen when you bring a third party into the equation, and we also have some value in zooming out and making sure this is fitting in correctly with the rest of the financial plan and the other puzzle pieces that are involved.

[00:34:56] TB: Yeah, the act of investment is a necessary, I don’t want to say evil, but it’s a necessary thing that we need to do to, again, get in front of things like inflation and taxes. A lot of advisors make that the central part of their practice and it is important. I don’t want to say it’s not important. But it typically takes a backseat to a lot of the other things that are going on in life, whether that is, “Hey, I need to pull money out of this investment, because we have to put an additional on our house, because I’m taking care of an aging parent.” Or, “Hey, we have a kid that’s going to college. So, we need to, again, change some things around.” Or, “Hey, I lost my job, so I’m not going to be able to invest like I was.”

The thing with a financial plan is that, the value is more in planning, not the plan. And the investment piece is very important, and it can be as complicated as you want to make it. But even in the simplest version, it can be complicated, because again, if we’re talking about an asset allocation, the example that I gave is in a TSP, but if you’re trying to do that across a brokerage account, an IRA, a Roth IRA, some of the task, it can very quickly, when you add layers, get more and more complicated. But I think that the – yeah, the value, I think, with working and this is at any part of the financial plan, not just the investments. It’s almost like an am I crazy type of – am I crazy to be doing this? Should I give myself permission to do this? And sometimes, because of the environment or the way that we live today with social media, like there’s so much gaslighting. You can almost start to doubt your own judgment. So, it’s sometimes good to have a rock or a steady influence, and this is at, really, any part of your life, but I think finance is what we’re talking about here to just say like, “Hey, am I crazy? Or what do we do here? Or this is a variable or this is a bump in the road? Or this is an opportunity, like what’s the best way to proceed?” Again, super biased. But I think that’s really the value. It’s not necessarily saying like, “Hey, we’re going to beat the market and all that nonsense. It’s like, life has happening, and are we living a wealthy life or not?

[00:37:20] TU: Yeah. And so, to that point, whether you are a new practitioner listening, early on in this journey of saving for the future, mid-career pharmacists wondering, “Hey, am I on track? Are there other things I should be thinking about? How does this fit in with other goals that I’m working towards? Or, pre-retiree, retiree thinking about more the distribution stage and building that retirement paycheck, which we’re going to talk about on our fourth and final part of the series. Regardless of where you’re at in the financial journey, our fee only financial planning team of five certified financial planners, in-house tax team that includes a CPA and an IRS enrolled agent. They’re ready to work with you to build your retirement plan, among work with you on your other financial goals.

So, you can book a free discovery call, learn more about our one on one financial planning services that is customized for the pharmacy professional. You can book that call at yfpplanning.com. Again, that’s yfpplanning.com. Thanks for listening and have a great rest of the week.

[OUTRO]

[00:38:09] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and it is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. 

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog post and podcast is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analysis expressed herein are solely those of your financial pharmacist unless otherwise noted and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward looking statements, which are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer.

Thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 273: Alphabet Soup of Retirement Accounts (Retirement Planning)


Alphabet Soup of Retirement Accounts (Retirement Planning)

On this episode, sponsored by Insuring Income, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, sits down with Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP®, for the second part of the four-part series on retirement planning. Together they discuss the alphabet soup of retirement accounts including commonly used vehicles for accruing a nest egg. 

Episode Summary

YFP Co-founders Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, and Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP®,  discuss the alphabet soup of retirement accounts in this episode, the second part of the four-part series on retirement planning. Tim and Tim know that planning for retirement and building a nest egg can be overwhelming with so much to consider. In this episode, they break down common vehicles for building a nest egg into two main buckets. Tim Baker differentiates between tax-advantaged accounts administered by the employer and those administered by the individual. Tim and Tim spend time discussing how each tax-advantaged account works, including the contribution limits, catch-up provisions, and phase-outs where applicable. They get specific on how not all “buckets” are equal in terms of what you, as the investor or retiree, will receive. Due to the nature of retirement accounts and their relationship to the financial and tax plans, Tim and Tim share the importance of marrying the retirement plan to tax planning for the most benefit to the investor. Lastly, Tim and Tim explain that there are many factors to consider when determining the priority of saving among different tax-advantaged accounts, reference resources for listeners on prioritizing investments, and mention the services provided by YFP Planning and the YFP Tax team for pharmacists. 

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRODUCTION]

[00:00:00] TU: Hey everybody, Tim Ulbrich here. Thank you for listening to the YFP Podcast, where each week we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. 

On this week’s episode, Tim Baker and I continue with the second of our four-part series on retirement planning. Last week on Episode 272, we discuss, determining how much is enough for retirement. This week, we take a step forward by talking about the alphabet soup of retirement accounts including commonly used vehicles when occurring a nest egg. Highlights from the show include differentiating tax advantaged accounts into those that are administered by the employer, and those that are administered by you the individual, how each tax advantaged account works, including contribution limits and ketchup provisions, and why not all buckets are created equal, and factors to consider when determining the priority of saving among different tax advantaged retirement accounts. 

Now before we jump into the show, I recognize that many listeners may not be aware of what the team at YFP Planning does in working one-on-one with more than 270 households in 40 plus states. YFP Planning offers fi only, high-touch financial planning that is customized to the pharmacy professional. If you’re interested in learning more about how working one-on-one with a certified financial planner may help you achieve your financial goals, you can book a free discovery call at yfplanning.com. Whether or not YFP Planning, financial planning services are a good fit for you, know that we appreciate your support of this podcast and our mission to help pharmacists achieve financial freedom. 

Okay, let’s hear from today’s sponsor, and then a jump into my conversation with certified financial planner, Tim Baker. 

[SPONSOR MESSAGE]

[00:01:39] TU: This week’s podcast episode is brought to you by Insuring Income. Insuring Income is your source for all things term, life insurance and own occupation, disability Insurance. Insuring Income has a relationship with America’s top rated term Life Insurance and Disability Insurance Company, so pharmacists like you, can easily find the best solutions for your personal situation. To better serve you, Insuring Income reviews all applicable carriers in the marketplace for your desired coverage. Supports clients in all 50 states and make sure all of your questions get answered. 

To get quotes and apply for term life or disability insurance, see sample contracts from disability carriers or learn more about these topics. Visit insuringincome.com/yourfinancialpharmacist. Again that’s insuringincome.com/yourfinancialpharmacist.

[INTERVIEW]

[00:02:31] TU: Tim Baker, welcome back.

[00:02:33] TB: Yeah, good to be back, Tim. Looking forward to part two of this series. 

[00:02:37] TU: Yes, this is our second part of the four part series we’re doing on retirement planning. Last week, we talked about, How to Determine How Much is Enough? We ran through some mistakes scenarios and calculations to determine that number. This week, we’re going to start to get into more of the X’s and O’s on how to get there. As I mentioned, as we wrapped up last week’s episode, often when we begin to wrap our mind around, okay, this 3 million, this 4 million, this 5 million number and we begin to accept what that is and what we need to be saving each month to get there. 

The next natural question is, all right, where do I actually invest the money? What are the vehicles and options that are available? That’s what we’re going to talk about this week, some of the variety of investment vehicles and we’re primarily going to focus on tax advantaged retirement accounts, but certainly acknowledge that there are a variety of ways to build a nest egg outside of just the accounts that we’re going to talk about. So that could be real estate, that could be digital currency and assets, business ownership collectibles, and knowing many individuals are building a base that comes from, maybe not exclusively includes, but comes from traditional retirement accounts. We’re going to focus our time there. 

Another important distinction I want to make is that for our small business owners that are listening, we know there are several you out there. We will cover not in detail on this episode, but certainly there are other options from a business standpoint, SEP IRA, simple IRA, solo 401K. We’re not going to focus on those in this episode, but certainly, those are a valuable option to get us to our goal, as well. 

Tim, we throw these terms around all the time in pharmacy as notorious for throwing around acronyms. We put together pharmacy and financial planning. I feel like it gets worse. So we throw around term 401K, 457, TSPs, traditional IRAs, Roth IRAs, HSAs. This is often when we’re speaking with a group of pharmacists where we start to see the eyes gloss over. Okay, I understand there’s options I need to take advantage of, especially from a tax standpoint, but there’s a lot to consider, this can be overwhelming. We’re going to break this down into two buckets to give ourselves a framework. 

Those tax advantage accounts that are administered by the employer. Then the second bucket is those tax advantage accounts that are administered by you as the individual. So this distinction I think will help us begin to organize and have a framework for how we can think about different options that we have to save. Tim, let’s start with the accounts that are administered by the employer. Give us a rundown of the accounts that are available here and some of the distinctions between them.

[00:05:10] TB: The ones that are typically administered by the employer are going to be the 401K, the 403B, the TSP, those are the three primary ones. Then sometimes you run into things like the 457 plan, which is typically a bonus plan. Sometimes you see 401As, which are like 401Ks, except the participants aren’t making contributions to them. The one that we’ll talk about, synonymous with all the other ones is a 401K. The 401K, is the most popular profit sharing plan. Essentially, how it works is when you are hired by an employer. They’re going to say, “Hey, welcome to the team. As part of a benefit to working on our team, we have this 401K that we’ve set up through fidelity or whatever, whoever the custodian is. These basically are funded through salary deferrals from your paycheck.” 

Back in the day, you had to basically make that election yourself, but the Obama administration, I think, smartly made it, so you have to opt out. A lot of these plans, now you’re auto enrolled at a certain percentage into the plan, I think, based on your age into a target date fund. The backdrop of this, Tim is back in the day, when our dads were starting the career, the most prevalent retirement plan was a defined benefit plan, a pension. What happened over really started in the 80s and 90s, employers were starting to see how big of a burden that was on their own balance sheets, because they were basically carrying the lion’s share of saving for the employees retirement. The 401k was introduced, which is a defined contribution plan and that means that that risk of having enough save for retirement has shifted from the employer to the employee. 

Now it is up to the employee to figure out how much they need to be different from their paycheck, where to invest it, and then how to distribute it tax efficiently in retirement. The problem is that we just aren’t necessarily good at that. The 401K has really taken off and now defined contributions will outpace pensions, as many of us know that do not have pensions. Participants make elective salary deferrals and for anything that doesn’t have Roth in front of it, contributions are not tax until they’re withdrawn. What this means is that, I’m a pharmacist, and I’m making $120,000 a year, and I put 20,000, just for round numbers, the maximum you can put in is 20,500, but let’s say, I put $20,000 into my 401K. The IRS taxes me as if I made $100,000. It goes in pre-tax. 

Now the money is actually, it’s only going to be taxed either going in or going out. That traditional 401K, that $100,000 is going to grow and grow and grow. Then when we pour it out in retirement, that’s when it’s going to be taxed. If we think about this, say I’m going to 25% tax bracket at age, we’ll say 40, it’s not taxed at 25%. It goes in tax free. Now let’s say I’m at age 65, I’m retiring. I’m at a 25% tax bracket. If that $100,000, let’s say, it grows, but that’s going to be taxed at 25%. Your benefit, there’s really no benefit either way. The benefit comes if your tax bracket is actually lower. If you’re at a 20% tax bracket, that’s when you see some of the statements. That’s for the traditional. Now if you are age 50 and older, Tim you can make a $6,500 catch up. 

Now all of these things are the same for a 403B, which is typically 401K you typically see for profit 403B, you typically see for a non-profit or hospital that type of thing. The 403B has an additional catch up and it says typically if you are a certain age and you have a certain years of service, you can put in as typically 15 years you can put an additional $3,000. So you get your 20,500 Plus the 6,500 regular catch up plus another 3000. So that’s just a funky thing with 403Bs. TSPs are very similar to all of them they have the catch-up, not like a 403B, but a regular catch-up. Their matches the same across, so TSPs is the Thrift Savings Plan, typically for military government workers, their match is 5%. The big benefit for the TSP is that they’re in basically five funds that are super low costs, which is not necessarily the case with the 401K or the 403B. 

The appropriate use for these, Tim are typically when If the employer wants to provide a quality retirement benefit, without being required to make ongoing employee contributions. So you can have, you can have an employer that offers a 401K, but doesn’t put any match or anything into it, that’s up to the employer to do that. A lot of employers are doing this to incentivize their employees to save, but also as a retention, because you can have vesting schedules attached to it, which means if you leave after a certain amount of time, you don’t get that match. It’s a great vehicle if you have a young workforce, because you can accumulate savings over a long period of time. But the basically the risk is on the employee to do what they need to do to get to have an adequate retirement.

A lot of 401Ks allow for insert with withdrawals for hardships, you can take loans against it. Most 401K’s these days, same thing with the TSP and the and the 403B have a Roth component. The big disadvantage here, Tim, is that oftentimes a 401K can be expensive. So typically, the rule of thumb is, the smaller the employer, the more expensive the 401K is to that individual participant. I’ve seen it, where all in cost on a 401K is almost 2%. So think of that, I have $100,000 in a 401K, $2,000 per years coming out either to pay an advisor expense ratio or things like that. Whereas something a TSP, it’s like, three basis points, which is $30, compared to 2000. 

Then the other disadvantage is that, it’s not going to guarantee an adequate retirement benefit as a pension would. Oftentimes, again, smaller 401K is the investment selection won’t be great. That’s the main one. Again, all of those, the TSP, the 403B are going to be very, very similar to that without with some minor nuance. The 457 plan, which some people will see is a non-qualified tax advantage, deferred compensation retirement plan. This is typically for people who work in state government, local government, even some nonprofits. This is often another bucket that you can put up to $20,500 into. It’s the same thing they’re typically not taxed until it was withdrawn, but often those are available to the creditors of that. If you work for a local government that goes bankrupt, then you could potentially lose that money, which is problematic. That’s a big thing that some people will see as a 457. So typically, work on the 401K, the 403B first and look at a 457 after you’re maxing that out already.

[00:12:37] TU: Tim, correct me if I’m wrong. When I was at one university, we had the 457 available with a 403B and a 401A, but the 457 amounts was on top of in addition to –

[00:12:49] TB: Correct. Completely separate bucket, yeah. Sometimes we get that – we’re going to talk about those administered at individual levels, some people say, “Well, if I put 20,500 into my 401K, can I also put money into an IRA?” So they’re separate buckets, just like the 457 is a separate bucket that’s available to you.

[00:13:07] TU: Great synopsis. That was covering our first bucket, which is those that are administered by the employer, as Tim articulated, really looking at those interchangeable 401K, 403B, TSP, typically for profit, not for profit, those that work for a federal government agency organization. He talked about the contribution limits per years, some of the catch-up provisions after the age of 50. Then the additional one for the 403B. Then making sure we’re not confusing, a Roth 401K, Roth 403B with a Roth IRA, which we’ll talk about here in a moment. I think as we see the Roth employer sponsored accounts grow in popularity, there’s some confusion among okay, I’m contributing to a Roth 401K, can I also contribute to a Roth IRA? 

The answer to that is yes, there are some considerations there, but totally separate. One administer by the employer when administered by the individual. Let’s shift gears, Tim to that second bucket. Those administered by the individual. Two, subcategories here that I want to talk about would be the IRA accounts, both the traditional and the Roth IRA. Then the second would be an individual that wants to invest in a brokerage accounts. Let’s start with the IRAs differentiate the traditional IRA, the Roth IRA, some of the income limits and considerations for pharmacists that would contribute here.

[00:14:22] TB: Yeah. So same thing, when you see traditional or no precursor at all just IRA, you’re going to think pre-tax, when you see something Roth, you’re going to think after tax. The traditional IRA is a retirement account. It’s the traditional individual retirement account. It is an account that you either set up yourself so you go to something like Fidelity, a Vanguard, TD Ameritrade, a Betterment and you basically open it up or you can work with an advisor and they’ll basically open one up to advise for your benefit. 

The traditional IRA is funded with pre-taxed dollars. Again, this is a separate bucket away from the 401KL, the TSP, etc. you can contribute up to $6,000 per year, plus $1,000 per year catch up if you’re age 50 or older. Now, anybody essentially with earned income can contribute to a traditional IRA. It’s subject to phase out deductions. So what does that mean? If you are a single individual, and you make anywhere from 68,000, to $78,000 like AGI Adjusted Gross Income, then once you get to $78,001, you can no longer take a deduction for your IRA. I’ll give you example on the other side, so if you make less than $68,000, so $67,999, you can deduct 100% of your say $6,000 deduction or contribution. It phases out, which means that once you get to that midpoint, so 68,000, to 78,000 the midpoint is 73,000. 

If you put $6,000 in you can deduct 3000, but then you can’t, which is half of it and you can’t deduct the other 3000. This is really good for people that are listening to the podcasts that might be fellows or residents or maybe they’re in school, and they’re working and they’re trying to save some for retirement, typically, pharmacists are not going to be allowed to make a deductible contribution. So just to give you an example, if I’m out there, and I make $60,000, which is below that, and I’m single, and I make below that threshold, and I put $6,000 into my traditional IRA. The government, the IRS looks at me as if I made 54,000. So similar example, as I used before. 

Now, the difference between the IRA and the 401K is the 401K is coming out of your paycheck. It’s not basically hitting your bank account. This is typically funded where it hits your bank account and you’re technically contributed into that with after tax dollars, but you’re just deducting it on your 1040 when you go to file. That’s a little bit of the nuance. The phase out, if you’re married filing jointly is 109 to 129, which again, typically for a lot of pharmacists if they’re dual income, they’re going to be above that that threshold. The same thing as, so that $6,000 goes in pre-tax, it gets invested, it grows tax free. Then when we pour that out in retirement, when we withdraw it in retirement, that’s when it’s taxed. Again, it’s either tax going in or going out. 

The Roth is the one that’s tax going in. The Roth IRA is an account that’s fun it with after tax dollars and it stays after taxes. You’re not going to take a deduction. So basically, it’s the same thing, you can contribute up to $6,000 plus $1,000 after age 50. Now, and this is an aggregate, if you were to contribute $4,000 a year to your traditional you can only contribute $2,000 to your your Roth IRA. This is subjected to phase outs to actually contribute. So what that means is that once you make as a single person, once you make the phase out is 129 to 144,000. Tim, once you make $144,001 the door slams shut, and you can no longer make a contribution to the Roth IRA. For married filing jointly that ranges 204,000 to 214,000. So if you’re a couple and you make more than 214,000, you can’t directly put money into the Roth IRA, which then gets into that, you fund a traditional IRA, you got to go through all those rules that we talked about and then you can do a backdoor Roth IRA, again easier to explain, harder in actual concept. 

To just reiterate, if I make, we’ll use the same example. Let’s say I make $60,000. I put $6,000 into a Roth IRA. Now, the government looks at me as if I made $60,000 that $6,000 that goes in, it grows tax free. Then when I pour it out in retirement, because it’s already been taxed, that $6,000 is all mine, or whatever it grows to. That’s the big thing that we often talk about is like, if you have a million dollars in your traditional IRA at the end of the rainbow, when you’re going to retire, you don’t have a million dollars. If you’re in a 25% tax bracket, you actually have $750,000 and the government has 250,000. If there’s a million dollars in a Roth IRA or Roth TSP or a Roth 401K, that money is yours. That’s super important to remember. I think I hit everything with Roth.

[00:19:34] TU: Yeah. Then again, Tim, just to zoom out for a moment so in the first segment, we talked about the big security number, what do we need at the end of the rainbow at the nest like three, $4 million. We back that into, okay, what do we need to be saving per month based on a set of assumptions, asset allocation, risk tolerance, all those things? Maybe that number is 800 1200, 1500, whatever it is per month. Now we’re talking about where does that go, right? So we started with employer counts. Is that a 401K, for profit 403, not for profit TSP federal government? Or and or are there individual options, traditional, perhaps maybe not a deductible option there for many pharmacists based on income or a direct Roth or backdoor Roth, depending on income limits for pharmacists. 

If you put these two together, and where we see many pharmacists beginning to build their foundation, again, not the only place that we’re going to be investing 20,500, certainly more than that, for those that are listening, that are in that catch up age, older than 50. Then on the individual side $6,000 per year, so 26,500 per year between the two of those and that 20,500, Tim is not including any employer match as well, right? That’s employee –

[00:20:46] TB: Yeah. If you include the employer match, and anything else they give you, I think the number can go all the way up to 61,000. As long as the employee and the employer match doesn’t exceed, 61,000 you’re good to go, which that’d be nice if you got that much in a match.

 [00:21:02] TU: We put the two of these together. Again, not investment advice, but we put the two of these together, and we’re now north of $2,000 per month towards our savings goal. Is this the only way we can invest? Absolutely not, but these two tax advantage accounts, and there’s a lot of strategy and consideration here. Tim, you mentioned it a few moments ago, tax bracket today, tax brackets in the future, what else is going on in terms of the tax situation, another great example where we need to marry the tax plan with the financial plan, but a really good place to begin to think about the foundation for our investing.

[00:21:33] TB: Yeah. That’s a common question that we have, is like, should we put in Roth, we put it in traditional, should we be putting it in taxable, which we haven’t talked about, the brokerage account, which we can talk about here in a sec. The answer is yes, all of them. Because what we do when we try to build a retirement paycheck, we’re trying to get that money out of those tax advantaged accounts at the lowest tax rate possible. The other thing at the sprinkle in is oftentimes what use the brokerage account for, so often you use a brokerage account for an early retirement or to delay claiming Social Security as long as possible. So you increase that percentage of a known income stream from the government that’s inflation protected, and that is a bigger part of your percentage of income, that’s huge and a lot of people will not do that correctly. 

Before we get to the Brokerage account, the last thing I’ll say about all these accounts that we talked about, so far, the 401K, TSP 403B, Roth traditional IRA, the other one that’s often synonymous with a traditional IRA is a rollover IRA, that’s typically, when you’ll see that’s also pre-tax. Worth mentioning for all of these accounts is that if you take non-qualified withdrawals, which that’s typically when you take money out before you’re 59 and a half years old, you’re subject to a 10% penalty along with paying the tax. That’s basically discouraging you to rob that account for a car, or a home downpayment or things like that. There’s exceptions to that rule, but that 10% penalty it’s a good way for you to keep that money in there. 

Again, we talked about gratification, sometimes it’s really hard for us to lock that money away and not use it until the future. So the brokerage account, Tim, is the last account that we can talk about, and the brokerage account is, it’s a taxable account. It’s an account that you can set up through any of those custodians that I mentioned. It’s funded using after tax dollars. This can either be set up as an individual account, so in your name, just like all your retirement accounts or a joint account with a spouse or a partner. The contributions to this are unlimited. With all these other accounts, we’re saying, “Oh, you can only put $20,000, 500 or $6,000.” Here’s have at it, if you if you get an inheritance, or you’re maxing everything out, and you can put five grand a month or whatever into an account, you can do that. 

You typically use this when you’ve exhausted your retirement contributions previously mentioned. The other one that we of course, always mentioned is the HSA, it’s another bucket, that’s good. You typically use this account when you’ve exhausted those things or if you’re doing something else like, we often use this account for a tax bomb for a non-PSLF strategy. It could be for something that –

[00:24:23] TU: Early retirement. 

[00:24:24] TB: Yeah. It could be something that’s an early retirement. So if I’m going to retire at age 55 and I’m not going to be, I can’t collect on my other accounts until I’m age 59 and a half, you would use it for that or if you’re saying okay, I’m going to retire it 62 or 65. I’m going to delay to claim Social Security to age 70. I’ll use that account from that as well. Those are typically or the last one, which is not necessarily retirement related. You might say, “Hey, Tim, I want to basically buy a piece of real estate investment in 10 years.” I’m like, “Well, that’s probably long enough time horizon where we probably should do something other than a CD or high yield savings account.” So let’s build a balanced portfolio or something along those lines that we can get a little bit more return for a little bit more risk. 

The advantage to the brokerage account is the greatest flexibility, there’s no penalty to withdraw, as I mentioned from the other accounts do, you can recognize losses to offset gains, that’s called tax loss harvesting. That’s one of the big disadvantages that when you put in will use the $6,000. Tim, I put $6,000 into my Roth account or my traditional. When we say it grows tax free, what that means is when you buy mutual fund ABC at $100 per share, when you sell it and withdraw the account and say it’s $300 per share in the future, there is a gain of $200 for that investment. 

Inside of a Roth inside of a Roth IRA, a 401K, a traditional IRA, you don’t have to pay tax on that $200 per share gain, in a taxable or a brokerage account you do so what that means is that you’ve contributed after tax dollars, you made the investment, you have a 200 per share gain, you have to pay either long term capital gains on that, which is typically 0%, 15%, or 20%, most pharmacists are probably going to be in the 15% bracket, or short term capital gains tax, which means you’ve held it for a year or less, that’s typically ordinary income, which is 24% tax bracket plus whatever, in your state. So that’s the big disadvantage that you’re taxed multiple times on that investment, but it allows you flexibility to do what you need, move money in and out. The investment selection is yours and there’s typically less fees, because you don’t have that big administrator typically hanging over it like you do in a 401k or even an IRA.

We often see these, Tim with employee stock purchase programs, so if you’re in an ESPP with your employee, employer, they’ll put those dollars in a taxable account, typically RSUs are granted and they’ll put those dollars or shares and investment accounts, ISOs, that type of thing, as well. There are specific scenarios where you’ll use this, but the brokerage account, again, is often one that we don’t talk about enough for retirement purposes. Sometimes I don’t like to use it especially the further away you are for retirement, because you could say, “Hey, Tim, this is for retirement.” But it’s like, just kidding. Five years later we’re going to use it for something else. 

Now that $50,000 that I accounted for in your nest egg calculation is gone, right? That can be problematic. That 10% penalty, although it stinks, it can be a good firewall for you not to take that money out, but this is another important account to utilize as we’re growing our assets to then disperse in retirement, and we want to make sure that we pick efficiently from a tax perspective from each of these buckets year over year.

[00:28:00] TU: Tim, when you teach this topic, and I think you teach it so effectively, you mentioned earlier that not all buckets are created equal, right? If you have a million dollars in a Roth, a million dollars in a traditional, a million dollars in an HAS, a million in a 401K, a million in a brokerage account, you don’t really have $5 million. I mean, I guess you do on paper, but there’s going to be tax implications that are different. The visual you give for the brokerage is it’s got holes in the bucket, right, because we’re putting money in after tax, and then we’re going to incur either short or long term capital gains doesn’t mean it doesn’t have value, you gave several examples where it could in terms of bridging to delay Social Security, it could be a short or mid-term type of purchase five, 10 years if you want to get some growth momentum for the market, don’t want that sitting in our checking account. So there’s value there, but we also want to make sure we’re looking at the right priority of how we’re investing. 

I think one of the common mistakes that we are seeing, I think in part, just because of the availability in marketing around brokerage accounts is, are we putting money in a brokerage account and perhaps not taking advantage of some of the tax favored accounts we talked about. Is that intentionally the choice we’re making or are we not considering the tax implications by doing that? 

[00:29:09] TB: Yeah. That’s one thing we talked about, it’s a prioritization. We see pharmacists that come in, they have 1000s of dollars in a brokerage account, but they’re not really taking full advantage of match or, and I get it, Tim. I’m not a hater. I get it, because a lot of times we’re marketed to by said company that says “Hey, buy this and invest and you’ll get free bitcoin or ETFs or stock.” I understand the want to scratch the itch and get in and try to make money and invest, but if you think about it, and again, it’s not a bad thing, because you can offset losses, but if I’m being taxed already on if I’m in a 24% tax bracket for that money goes in, and then I’m taxed another 10 or 15% when it from capital gains, but then you can defer that tax or in a pre-tax account or pay it after it comes out. I think that there’s a lot of meat on the bone with regard to efficiency, right? That’s one of the things we preach is just being efficient. 

[00:30:14] TU: Yeah.

[00:30:14] TB: All of these have a place, particularly when talking about the in this retirement series, and there should be attention paid in a strategy and an allocation for each, just asking these questions if you’re listening to this, look at your balance sheet. Always comes back to the balance sheet and the goals. Look at the balance sheet, how much do you have in an after tax? How much do you have in taxable? How much you haven’t pre-tax? And take stock of where you’re at. 

Once you know where you’re at, then you can outline where you want to go. Yeah, I think, it’s really important to look at the priority. Again, I don’t hate on anyone in that, who is doing that. It’s just a matter of focusing and say, “Okay, what is important, what’s not important? Sometimes if we want to do some stock picking and things like that in a brokerage account, let’s just keep it minimum 5% of the overall portfolio, and then we can go from there. I’m a big believer in keep it simple and keep fees low and set the right asset allocation, and then go from there.

[00:31:11] TU: While we’re talking about priority, we’re not going to dig in depth on this episode, because we’ve done it on many others, ruling to 165 is one example, but we can’t omit the HSA when we’re talking about priority of investing. Back to my visual of your brokerage account with the holes in it, the HSA is the bulletproof account, right? Depending on how we’re using that account, we have an opportunity to avoid taxes throughout. Obviously, if we have healthcare expenses that we need to fund, we can, of course, use it for that and have some tax advantages. 

Got to be working for an employer, we have a high deductible health plan that dollars aren’t as big in terms of contributions that we’re going to see in a 401K or 403B, so 3650 for an individual 7300 for family in 2022. Some catch up provisions are again, but another tax optimization strategy that want to be considering. I hope we’re hitting that point home, intentionally is that I think one of the things our planning team does so well and a shout out to the integration between the planning and the tax team is, are those two things in sync? Are we are we planning with a tax mindset? Are we also thinking about the tax implications, but also building the financial plan around that as well? 

Tim, I probably should have mentioned this earlier, but we’ve thrown around a ton of numbers in terms of contribution amounts, we’ve talked about phase outs and AGI limits, and maybe some folks are trying to scratch those down. Hopefully they weren’t doing that when they’re driving, but we have all these numbers available for use, you don’t need to memorize any of those. We’ve got a sheet that has 2022 important numbers, even beyond just what we’re talking about here and investing savings, you can go to yourfinancialpharmacist.com/2022numbers, again, yourfinancialpharmacist.com/2022numbers and get that information. 

Again, this is our second part in a four part series on retirement planning. Next week, we’re going to come back to risk tolerance versus risk capacity, a very important distinction between those and how we begin to determine within these accounts we talked about in this episode, where we actually start to invest the money. Then finally, we’ll wrap up in our fourth part about how to build the retirement paycheck. The team at YFP Planning is ready, whether you’re new practitioner, mid-career pharmacist, someone who is approaching retirement, our fee only financial planning team of five certified financial planners and an in-house tax team, including a CPA and an IRS Enrolled Agent, ready to work with you to help build your retirement plan among your other financial goals as well. 

If you want to learn more about the one-on-one fee only comprehensive financial planning services that are offered by YFP Planning, you can visit yfpplanning.com to book a free discovery call. Thanks for listening. We’ll see you next week as we continue the series on retirement planning. 

[SPONSOR MESSAGE]

[00:33:50] TU: Before we wrap up today’s show, let’s hear an important message from our sponsor Insuring Income. If you are in the market to add own occupation, disability insurance, term life insurance, or both, Insuring Income would love to be a resource. Insuring Income has relationships with all of the high quality disability insurance and life insurance carriers you should be considering and can help you design coverage to best protect you and your family. 

Head over to insuringincome.com/yourfinancialpharmacist or click on the link in the show notes to request quotes, ask a question or start down your own path of learning more about this necessary protection. 

[OUTRO]

[00:34:27] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on the show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment.

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of your financial pharmacists unless otherwise noted and constitute judgments as of the date publish. Such information may contain forward-looking statements which are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. Thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacists podcast. Have a great rest of your week.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 272: How Much Is Enough? (Retirement Planning)


How Much Is Enough? (Retirement Planning)

On today’s episode, sponsored by APhA, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, sits down with Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP®, to discuss how much you need for retirement in part one of the four-part series focused on retirement planning.

Episode Summary

Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, sits down with Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP®, to discuss how much is enough when it comes to retirement planning in part one of the four-part series focused on retirement planning. In this discussion, Tim and Tim cover finding a balance between saving for the future and living a rich life along the way, factors to consider including determining how much is needed when building a nest egg, what the 4% rule is and why it is commonly used as a safe withdrawal rate during retirement, and why time in the market and savings rate matter more than the rate of return on investments. Tim Baker shares his opinion on financial planning as an exercise in goal setting for the long term while balancing experiencing life in the present and how financial planning and even minor changes in your investment portfolio can have a significant impact on your total retirement amount. They dive into what many folks consider a safe savings rate and considerations for increasing that savings rate dependent on numerous factors in the financial plan. Tim and Tim explain the rule of 25, which is popularly used in the FIRE (Financial Independence Retire Early) community as a guideline for retirement savings, how it works, and how it compares to the 4% rule. They close with general calculations and formulas for determining the nest egg for retirement and tease next week’s episode on the “alphabet soup” of retirement accounts.

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRODUCTION]

[00:00:00] TU: Hey everybody, Tim Ulbrich here and thank you for listening to The YFP Podcast, where each week, we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom.

On this week’s episode, Tim Baker and I kick off a four-part retirement planning series by discussing how to determine how much is enough when it comes to saving for retirement. Highlights from the show include finding a balance of saving for the future, while also living a rich life along the way, as Tim Baker says, “It can’t be just about the ones and zeros in the bank account.” Factors to consider when building a nest egg and determining how much is needed. What the 4% rule is and why it is commonly used as a safe withdrawal rate during retirement. And why time in the market and savings rate matters more than rate of return. Before we jump into the show, I recognize that many listeners may not be aware of what the team at YFP Planning does, and working one on one with more than 270 households in 40 Plus states.

YFP Planning offers fee only, high-touch financial planning that is customized to the pharmacy professional. If you’re interested in learning more about how working one on one with a certified financial planner, who may help you achieve your financial goals, you can book a free discovery call at yfpplanning.com. Whether or not YFP Planning financial planning services are a good fit for, know that we appreciate your support of this podcast and our mission pharmacists achieve financial freedom.

Okay, let’s hear from today’s sponsor, and then jump into my conversation with certified financial planner, Tim Baker.

[SPONSOR MESSAGE]

[00:01:33] TU: Today’s episode Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast is brought to you by The American Pharmacists Association. APhA has partnered with Your Financial Pharmacist to deliver personalized financial education benefits for APHA members. Throughout the year, APhA will be hosting a number of exclusive webinars covering topics like student loan debt, payoff strategies, home buying, investing, insurance needs, and much more. Join APhA now to gain premier access to these educational resources and to receive discounts on YFP products and services. You can join APhA at a 25% discount by visiting pharmacist.com/join, and using the coupon code YFP. Again, that’s pharmacist.com/join, and using the coupon code, YFP. 

[INTERVIEW]

[00:02:19] TU: Tim Baker, welcome back on the show.

[00:02:21] TB: Thanks, Tim. Yeah, good to be back.

[00:02:23] TU: It’s been a while. I mean, you’ve done some case studies with the planning team, which have been awesome. But we haven’t been back on the show together in some time, so I’m looking forward to this series that we’re going to be doing on retirement planning. We’ve got a four-part series plan, all about retirement planning, starting with determining how much is enough, what do we need as we look at preparing towards retirement, and ending with strategies and considerations for actually building that retirement paycheck. And a topic that’s often overlooked, we’ll talk about that in detail when we get to that fourth and final part.

I believe we’ve constructed this, Tim, in a way that whether it’s a new practitioner who’s just getting started wondering what’s this big scary number for off in the future, or someone who’s mid-career checking in to see if they’re on track, or pre-retiree thinking about, “Hey, this is coming up, and are there some tweaks that I need to make, or adjustments or perhaps confirmation that I’m on track.” I think this topic is relevant, regardless of where someone is at, at their career.

So, we’re going to get into the dollars and cents. We’re going to nerd out on the nest egg and some of the X’s and O’s. But first, I think it’s valuable that we consider what is the purpose, what’s the vision for what we’re trying to do before we start thinking about, is it 3 million? Is it 4 million? Is it 5 million? So, Tim, talk to us about number one, why is this so important before we actually determine how much is enough, and then how are we going to get there? And how do we practically begin to accomplish defining the vision that we have when we think about retirement, and what that life will look like?

[00:03:57] TB: Yeah, so comprehensive financial planning, to me, it really boils down to the idea of how do I best go about living a wealthy life today, say in my 20s, 30s, 40s, 50s, and a wealthy life tomorrow. We typically think of tomorrow, more in terms of like the long-term horizon of in my, 60s, 70s, 80s, 90s through retirement. It can be really difficult for us, Tim, to kind of conceptualize time, or like, feel time. So, the further, when we kind of talked to clients, and we say like, what does success look like a year out, two years out, three years out, five years out, those conversations are a lot easier to have. But as that time horizon becomes more and more, we kind of lose sight of how to even like think in decades.

So, to me, that’s what comprehensive financial planning, is about is kind of coming up with solutions where you feel good about what you’re doing today and then what you’re planning for the long tomorrow. And I think what often happens is that individuals, kind of swing one way or the other. So, like in our household, I’m thinking about, “Oh, man, are we saving enough for retirement? Are we doing everything from the long term?” Whereas my wife is like, “Bro, we have two young kids, we need to make sure that we’re doing things with them while they’re young, and they’re still under our roof and all that kind of stuff.”

I actually think some people think that that’s like not a good thing, if you have two partners that are kind of diametrically opposed. I think it’s good, because I think it leads to balance and leads to address some of those conversations. So, if you’re all one way, then sometimes it’s really hard. If you’re like, save, save, save, it’s really hard for you to open up your hand and spend. But the other thing, sometimes people are afraid to talk about a planner is like, “I’m very spendthrifty. I’m not saving enough for the future, because I can’t see two feet in front of my face”, or just, “I grew up in an environment where we didn’t really save. We just kind of live for today and hope for the best.”

So, to me, this whole thing of like, how much is enough? It’s kind of an exercise in that and projecting out, okay, what is a reasonable number that we should be shooting for? And are we doing what we need to do to get there? I think the disconnect with this is, oftentimes, you’ll get a statement, Tim, or you’ll talk to a financial planner, and it’s like, “Oh, you need $4 million to retire.” It’s like, that’s such a big number and I look at what’s in my account, and I’m like, “Yeah, right.” It doesn’t even calculate or compute. So then, it’s almost like you give up, right?

But the problem is, is that the number for a lot of our listeners, it’s going to be multi millions that they’re not going to need to save more than likely. And we’ll get into things like, where does security play a role? And if that’ll be there, and all that kind of stuff? But to me, that’s really the exercise. Are we doing what we need to do today? And then are we doing what we need to do to ensure that we’re good to go for tomorrow. I think it’s about as simple as that, and I think when you talk about retirement planning, you’re looking at the full breadth of the timeline, and making sure that – because it just gets – the longer that you wait, I kind of look at it as, if you started in your 20s, you’re climbing like a steady grade. If you start in your 60s, its Mount Everest, because you literally can’t save enough to kind of overcome that, and the alternative is just a huge cut in your lifestyle, and what you’re going to be able to afford when you do turn off that W-2 or income that’s coming in every two weeks.

[00:07:47] TU: Yeah, and I think so many people, as you mentioned, feel defeated by and we’ll talk about the nest egg numbers and kind of how we get there. I think for many folks, maybe there’s confirmation of, “Hey, I am on track.” And for others, they’re like, they hit the stop button, because they’re like, “No way this is going to happen for me in the future.” Because of, it’s hard to really believe in trust the process and time value of money and compound interest and growth, and that’s a future thing. That’s a tomorrow thing. And as you mentioned, it’s hard to see and imagine our future selves, especially when we’ve got things right in front of us today. And so, this is where the balance comes in. We’re going to go through this exercise of how much is enough. But as we talked about over and over and over again on the show, like an investing retirement plan is another great example of that, we can’t look at any one of these in a silo because for many, if not everyone listening, this is not the only thing they’re worried about, right?

[00:08:39] TB: Yeah. And just to go back to that, like in terms of the numbers, basically, I was doing some research for the case study that we recently recorded with Kelly and Robert, and I was trying to construct, what was the reasonable purchase price for a home in Portland, Oregon. The average, I think, was something like $88,000, or something like that in the late ‘80s. So, think about that, like those numbers. And again, when I typically talk about investments, and I talk about the secret ninja, the termite that is inflation, I always say that, what is it, that $4 latte at Starbucks in 30 years is going to cost north of 10. Or my dad will say, “A nickel would buy the whole candy store.” Now, a nickel doesn’t buy anything. When he’s grown up, he’s growing up in the ‘40s and ‘50s.

So, yeah, and to your point like, it is one – the investment and the retirement piece is one of many, many things that you have to consider. Just the overall risk to your wealth and planning for a catastrophic event is huge. Things like taxes, which are so overlooked, and how to pay your fair share, but then mitigate how much your – there’s so many things that kind of go into this, and a lot of it, we will talk about today, it’s not even about the rate of return or anything like that. It’s just about putting money in bucket.

[00:10:00] TU: Time and money.

[00:10:01] TB: Yeah, and it’s more about the savings rate, then the rate of return. So, even those mechanics and like the behavioral finance, that kind of bleeds into everything, it’s just so imperative that we’re looking at this and examining it. And unfortunately, because either it’s a boring topic, or it’s a painful topic, or we have head trash related to it with our upbringing, or name a number of reasons why we don’t necessarily want to look at this or work on it, it just becomes harder and harder as we go.

To give you some numbers, Tim. So, if you look at a pharmacist with medium pay, and they’re saving about 15% of income with an average annual rate of 6%, which is about what the market returns. So, that’s a fairly aggressive portfolio. If you started at age 25, by the time that you reach age 60, you have a portfolio of $2.6 million. Now, if you’re at age 25, and you’re saving 15%, and you’re an aggressive, that’s pretty good. The fact of the matter is, is that you’re probably not doing – a lot of people are not saving 15%, right off the bat.

At 30, when you get to – so you have 30 years now of accumulation, it goes to 1.8 million. So, a pretty big drop. At 35, just five years later, so 35 to 60, 1.2. If you start to the ripe age of 40, turning 40 this year, Tim, to age 60, so just 20 years, now, you’re not even crossing that million dollars. You’re at 822,000. So, a lot of this is just the mechanics of it’s better than what it was in the past. In the past, if you had a 401(k), you actually had to like sign up. Now, a lot of them will auto enroll you, so you are getting out of the way. But what I would encourage people if they’re not thinking about this, is add that 1% or that 2% every year, so you can get to that 15% or 16%. 

During one of my recent courses, they were looking at what is the – everyone talks about the safe withdrawal rate. We’ll talk about that, the 4%. But what’s the safe savings rate? And the number that I remember is about 16%. So, if you are enrolled in your 401(k) and auto enrolled you at five, you are ways away. So, then the flip side of that is for you to make up, you’re going to have to be saving 20%, 25%, 30% later in your career to kind of make up for that. So, these are all things to kind of be mindful of as you’re navigating this minefield, so to speak.

[00:12:24] TU: Yeah. I think we’ve all had a parent, grandparent, friend, mentor, colleague. Somebody has told us, you got to start saving as early as you possibly can. And the numbers you just gave highlight that. If you start at 25, instead of 30, you’re adding about a million dollars. If you started 25 instead of 35, 1.5 extra, and that’s just simple math savings calculator, time value of money. And those numbers are hard to believe. But it becomes at a point where you see the exponential growth of those funds, but it feels like a grind for that first 10, 12 years, and you start to see the time value of money work, it’s magic. It really is 76ers style, trust the process long-term.

[00:13:03] TB: Trust the process, Jojo.

[00:13:04] TU: It’s hard, though, right? Because what did we talk about in this show? Homebuying with student loans, all these competing priorities. We got to have an emergency fund, we’ve got to be – we know folks are working hard to save for kid’s college while they’re also caring for elderly parents. We want to travel. I mean, all of these competing priorities, and pharmacists make a great income. But at the end of the day, there’s only so much to go around. And so, we’re not suggesting that this is an easy drop in the bucket, but something that we need to be intentional and consider with the rest of the plan.

[00:13:34] TB: I’ll say like, in our household, I’m always like, “Hey, can we increase your 401(k)?” “No.” It’s a battle in my household. And I’m like, “I do this for a living. Trust me.” But it’s that pool again. So, I’m like, “Okay. But if that’s taken away from what’s actually in our bank account, and then funding some of these other goals.” So, it’s a struggle. I mean, it’s a struggle in our household. And again, I probably am too diligent on the future, and not so much on the present, although I think some of the things that we’ve done in our financial plan is kind of said otherwise. But this is – it’s such a human thing, right? Because it’s that delayed gratification. But it is one of those things that if you can understand how to tweak it now, potentially early in your career, or even to say, even later in your career, knowing what to do for the final 5 to 10 years of your career can make all the difference.

The other side of that is, things like, what is your asset allocation when you’re in your 50s, if you’re trying to retire at 60? What do you what are you doing from a Social Security claiming strategy? Is there a way to lock an income through like an – there’s a ton of things that you can do to shore up your prospects, that just like what we see with student loans is kind of, sometimes you just follow the crowd. “Oh, my co-worker is doing this, so I’m doing that.” That never go goes away. “My brother in law is doing this, so I’m going to claim here.”

So, to me, it’s what I often say is like, you don’t have the same goals or the same balance sheet as whoever that is. But it’s hard to basically discern, “Hey, this is my situation. This is what I’m trying to do.” And wave through all of the stuff that’s out there to say, “Okay, this is the right – this is a clear path.” It’s just tough, and there’s so many variables that go into it.

[00:15:27] TU: Tim, one thing I want to share, and you’ve done a good job of opening my eyes to this, and we see this with clients over and over again, before we get into the numbers in the weeds is that we often talk about saving for retirement from a scarcity standpoint, as a, “Hey, I might not have enough, or are we going to fall short.” But we see many instances where you could argue like, is someone saving too much? And I think the value of this exercise, as you mentioned, is we have to find this balance between taking care of our future self and living a rich life today.

So, if we have a quick start in our retirement, we run the nest egg, and we see we’re not running a monthly deficit, perhaps there’s a surplus there, that begs the question of like, are we living the rich life today? So, just like an opportunity cost, of having too much in the emergency fund, there could be an opportunity cost of too much in a retirement account. Maybe a good problem to have, but it’s a problem, nonetheless. So, we’re going to talk about the balance of that, and I think that side gets overlooked often when we talk about retirement planning.

[00:16:24] TB: Yeah, I mean, we’ve definitely had clients that come in, where we actually do the analysis and it’s like, “You’re going to be fine.” So, we can afford to dial this back. And it’s not just retirement accounts, it’s education, especially if we kind of reframe what is the goal around education? What is the goal around retirement? A lot of the times, Tim, especially if you’re on the younger end of things, we’re planning as if so security’s not going to be there. So, you’re shouldering this all yourself. But the fact is, is that there’s a stat that says today, about 50% of people have Social Security makes up 40% of their income, or it’s flipped, the other way around. So, that’s not going to zero. It might be 25, it might be 30, and we can talk about Social Security more in detail. But if you think about that, and we say, okay, for every $10 that you’re going to spend on Social Security, or every $10 in your paycheck, $4 of that is going to come from Social Security. And if you claim right, that number gets bigger and bigger. If you kind of go through a proper claiming strategy, that’s huge.

So, we kind of plan as if like the worst-case scenario, that’s not going to be there. But if we can kind of back some of those numbers. If we use today’s averages, or maybe even like, on the low end, it really lends itself to saying, “Hey, this is not so bad. Again, if you have a lot of time.” Now, if you’re up against it, there’s a lot less wiggle room. It’s almost like you’re trying to steer the Titanic away from the iceberg. The closer that you are, the harder it is just to get around it. If you have miles, like a lot of younger pharmacists do, a few tweaks here and there just makes all the difference. And that could just be from again, the contribution rate, the allocation, or even just doing it and saying like, where am I tracking to like where we’re currently contributing, and then maybe back that off to then enjoy more today. Which I think is something that’s very unusual, because I feel like most financial planners will say, as much as you can, save. Because the more money you have, the more options you have.

But my view is, you can do that, and I kind of look at it as you can stick your head and run through the rose bushes to get your soccer ball. But you’re not really enjoying yourself on the way through. So, I think that’s where that balance comes through. I remember having conversations with clients about this very early when we were going through this of like, we back this off, we buy the home sooner, maybe we start our family sooner because of what this analysis shows us.

[00:19:03] TU: Start the business.

[00:19:05] TB: Yeah, exactly. Exactly, right. And to me, that is power. That’s options, right? So, that’s why I’m just a big believer in a plan and planning. It’s a dynamic thing.

[00:19:15] TU: Yeah. And I bring that up, because again, I think we don’t talk about much of that side of it, and it is more from that scarcity mindset. But I just heard from a client yesterday, it said, one of the greatest values I’ve gotten from the planning team is the permission to spend in an area that they have determined as richest in their own lives. And that was around hosting and welcoming people into their home. And obviously, there’s costs that come with hosting. But at the end of the day, if you’ve got 3.2 versus 4.1, but you’re going to look back on all those memories of friends and people in your home. What are you going to remember, right? I mean, it’s an obvious – so yeah, we got to take care of the future self, but also are we making sure that we’re living a rich life today.

Let’s talk dollars and cents. How much is needed? How much is enough? And there’s different ways of doing this. I want to start him kind of back of napkin math. Disclaimer here is that, this is certainly not the advice of, “Hey, I run some numbers. I punch some things in a calculator, and I know exactly what I need for retirement.” So, we’re going to plant some seeds. But there’s obviously a lot of in-depth analysis that goes into this. But I want to start with the rule of 25, which is a common quick math that’s used in the Financial Independence Retire Early Community, the FIRE Community, which says take 25 times your annual expenses, and that’s roughly the estimated amount that you’ll need to achieve financial independence.

So, let’s say someone’s listening and they look at okay, if I had about $100,000 per year of annual expenses, 25 times 100,000, I need about $2.5 million to get to the point of financial independence. And what that is really referring to, is the amount that you would need to have invested in a conventional stock and bond portfolio. We’ll talk a little bit more about that throughout this series, to probably, keyword “probably”, consider yourself financially independent, that you could not depend upon work income and be able to draw from that portfolio without concern that you’re going to be running out of money sooner than would be desired. And that comes from, Tim, and I want you to break this down a little bit further. That rule of 25, the inverse of that comes from the 4% rule, which as you mentioned just a few moments ago is about this concept of safe withdrawal rate.

So, break that down a little bit more for us. We’ll talk about this in depth when we get to the retirement paycheck piece. But what is the 4% rule? And I know this has been debated, but why might this be a good starting point for us to think about what’s needed in a portfolio?

[00:21:38] TB: Yeah, so the safe withdrawal rate is based on the work by William Bengen. And what he did was he looked at all of the historical rates of return for a portfolio and I think he did like a 60/40, portfolio 60% in equities, 40% in bonds, and he used a time horizon of 30 years. Basically, what he was trying to figure out is, what is the amount of money that can draw from the worst 30-year period where at the end of that 30-year period, there would still be money left over? So, the money would not run out.

He did the analysis and basically came out with – and I forget what the year. I think it was like 1961 to 1991? Or maybe it was like –

[00:22:31] TU: Yeah, it sounds right.

[00:22:32] TB: Yeah, right around, I think it was like ‘60s and ;90s and 4% — so what that presumes is that all of the other roll on your peers, you could actually take out more, and still be okay. But the worst period in, I think, he did it since like the 1920s all the way up until I think 2012. The worst period of that 30-year period was from the ‘60s to the ‘90s, and the safe withdrawal rate where their money was not going to run out was 4%. Now, there’s been a ton of debate of whether that is. It disregards things like taxes, it disregards things like fees associated, so whether you’re working with other fees, it disregards, kind of adjusting portfolio as you go through those 30 years.

And then the other thing is that, one of the observations of late is that for a lot of retirees in this low interest rate environment, obviously, it’s ticked up here this year, and equities performing what they’re performing, maybe 4% is not necessarily a good role going forward. So, there’s a lot of debate about that, and can you set it for 4% and be good to go? Maybe. But that’s basically what it’s based on. It’s like, okay, what is the worst, and when they’ve tested it in other, say, like, Italy, it failed, where this basically was successful 100% of the time, in that same period, it failed 80% of the time in Italy. Not to say that we would have, but they were dealing with a lot of inflation and things like that.

So, that’s basically it. So, the inverse to your point is 25 times your annual expenses. The problem with the annual expenses, Tim, is that if you ask somebody like what’s your annual expenses, unless they’re a FIRE nerd, they’re not going to know. And even that, when you’re trying to back into building a retirement paycheck, I know some financial planners, they don’t even ask the client for their annual expenses. They just assume that everything on their W-2 is basically they’re going to spend.

[00:24:29] TU: Their income, yeah.

[00:24:29] TB: And there’s other ways that you can discount and things like that. But that’s kind of where you get to it. I wouldn’t say that rule, I like rules of thumbs because they’re easy to remember, right? We talk about rules of thumb and other parts of the financial plan. So, if it’s $100,000, 2.5 million, I don’t think that that’s necessarily something that is not a bad thing to at least have in your back of your mind to shoot for. But there’s a lot of gray and again, a lot of gray with the accumulation but then also the kind of withdrawal phase of like, “Okay, I have this pot of money where there’s 2.5 or 4 million. How do I actually turn that into a paycheck that’s going to sustain me for the rest of my life?” And that’s a difficult kind of thing to tackle.

[00:25:09] TU: Yeah, and we’re going to cover that in more depth in the retirement paycheck part of the series. And obviously, we’ll dig into that after that as well. But just to bring my example back here. So, 2.5 was the number that we determined. Again, 4%, inverse of the rule 25. So, 2.5, 4% of 2.5 would be $100,000. So, that would be the idea, and correct me if I’m wrong, Tim. But I think the 4% rule also suggests that you’re essentially bumping that up 3% per year for inflation. So, the 100 would become 103, and then you would continue that on into the future. 

So, there are a lot of nuances in there. You mentioned tax is one. Obviously, what types of accounts do you have saved up. We’re in a time period like we’re in right now, where inflation is obviously a lot higher than 3%. That can have an impact. So, if folks want to just back up napkin, okay, maybe three, three and a half, well, three would be 33 times annual expenses, you can run some of these numbers and kind of see what they would shake out to be.

Tim, let’s get a layer deeper then, which is the nest egg calculation, something that our planning team and works with our clients a lot on, which is we’re trying to get more specific about the individual circumstances for that client, what they currently have, say, projected age of retirement, how long they might live, how does Social Security factor in. And then ultimately, I think one of the great outcomes of a nest egg calculation is getting out of this monopoly money state of mind of 3, 4, $5 million into the future that I can’t relate to, to what I actually need next month, and the month after, and making this tangible as a part of the monthly planning.

So, tell us a little bit, high level, about the nest egg calculation and what are some of the factors we’re considering to ultimately get to that? Are we on track? Or are we not on track for what it’s enough?

[00:26:58] TB: Yeah, so I feel like very early in my financial planning career, I looked at the different approaches to this particular question of like, do we have enough? There are other things like Monte Carlo analysis, which we can talk about, or bootstrapping, which we can talk about briefly after this. But I found that doing the nest egg calculation was really important. But when I did it in my last firm, we would basically stop at, “Hey, you need 3 million, Tim.” And then we would move on to, “This is what you need to do for insurance or your state plan or whatever.” It was, like you said, it was like monopoly money. Nothing about that connect it to the client, especially if the further away they were. I went out to reference that. If it’s like you have a million dollars and need 1.5, and you’re four or five or six years away, then that obviously connects.

So, what I basically did was, I was like, okay, I asked the question, how can we make this more digestible? I’ll walk through kind of high level of the nest egg, and then I kind of see how we pivot from there. What we do is we take a client, we take their current age, we take what their target retirement age, which for a lot of people, it’s like, I don’t know, 65, or maybe it’s full retirement age for a lot of – 67. And that gives us the work life expectancy. That’s basically the amount of time left that you have to work for the man. That’s your timeline, your career timeline. 

And then we look at what their life expectancy is, which you can go on to socialsecurity.gov, right now, put in your birth date, your gender, and it’ll spit out the year and the month you’re going to die. So, for me, it’s like 86.8 years old. Now, what most financial planners will do is they’ll go a little bit beyond that. So, 90 to 100. A lot of like financial planning software will go to age 100. You just kind of pick what is a good timeline for you. If you take the number that you’re going to retire at 67, for an example, and then say, we’re going to die at 95, then you have 28 years of basically, retirement, senior unemployment. And that’s what makes us really hard, Tim, is that we’re trying to solve an equation without all the variables, right? We don’t know when we’re going to pass away. So, we just make some assumptions. And then we look at what do we currently have in retirement savings, so that’s all the 401(k)’s, IRA’s, all the alphabet soup that we’ll talk about in the series.

And then what is your current income? Now, we use current income because we use a discounted amount called your wage replacement ratio, to kind of figure out what the need is in retirement. So, a lot of planners will use 60% to 80%. You just kind of figure out what that is. The logic behind that is that, as you are leading up to retirement, a big part of your paycheck, 20%, 30% is going to be just saving for retirement, and then when you retire, you’re not going to be doing that anymore. Then you have to make assumptions about what your portfolio looks like, so that’s where we kind of go into like a 6%. That’s a pretty aggressive portfolio. And then what that would look like in terms of draw down, and that gets your total needs.

So, as an example, if we look at a pharmacist that makes $120,000, and has $40,000, in the retirement accounts. They’re age 30. They’re going to basically work to 67. That’s 37 years. So, we start with at $120,000, and say, the wage replacement is 70%. That means that we need to plan for, 84,000. So, that’s 70% of 120. Now, if we zero out Social Security, that means that we’re planning the whole need ourselves, that’s 84,000. Now, in 37 years, Tim, when I’m 67, that’s going to be equivalent to about a quarter million dollars. What that means is that every year from 67 to 95, when I die, I need a quarter million dollars to live, which that’s where that kind of gets wonky, because you’re saying, okay, 84,000 is the same as 250,000 in 37 years. And the answer is yes.

[00:30:59] TU: Yeah. Tim, that’s the piece, like, as we’ve talked to so many groups on this. And obviously, for those listening that are near retirement, again, the disconnect is not there, because you’re close to that dollar, and you understand what the inflation that’s happened over time. But when we’re speaking with a group that’s earlier in their career, this is where they see the 3, 4 or 5 million and they’re like, “You all are crazy. The numbers don’t add up. How much money you need?” It’s because we’re thinking about in terms of today’s dollars versus future dollars.

[00:31:27] TB: Right. Correct. So, if we look at that, and you’re like, “Okay, quarter million dollars”, what do I need in the portfolio to sustain a quarter million dollars, essentially, for 28 years between ‘67 and ‘95? And the answer is about 4.4 million. Now, we know that social security is going to be there. So, even if we use something like nominal, and we say that the annual Social Security benefit is going to be something like 30,000, that drops it down to 2.8. So, it is a huge thing, but again, we zero that out. So then, we say, okay, let’s go at 4.4. And you say, okay, Social Security is going to be there. But let’s plan this, we’re going to do it all by ourselves.

That means that for us to get to 4.4, if we assume that we have $40,000 saved already, it’s basically a thousand bucks that we need to invest monthly with that current $40,000. So, to me, this is like the special sauce where I’m like, “Okay, 4.4 doesn’t really mean anything to me. So, how do I make it mean something?” We basically discount it back to like, how will it mean for me today? So, if we basically make a payment, this is a time value money calculation of $40,000, and we assume certain return everything, it’s $1,000. So, then what we do is we say, “Okay, client, how much are you putting into your 401(k), 5%? Okay, so 5% of 120? What’s your max, 3%? Okay, 3% of 120. That’s actually $800. So, 1,000 minus 800, the deficit is about 200 bucks. That’s basically on a monthly basis, where we have about $200 per month drag to get to that 4.4 million.

[00:33:07] TU: But 4.4 just became tangible, all of a sudden, right?

[00:33:10] TB: Right. That doesn’t necessarily account for everything like, fees, and taxes and all that kind of stuff. We’re just going to drag. But the idea is that, then we can say, okay, well, what happens if we max out the IRA? Or what happens if this isn’t an 80/20 portfolio, which is more conservative than like the example that we gave? What happens if we take a little bit more risk? What happens if we do this or that?  That, to me, is where you could say, “Wow, we’re actually a lot further along than we thought. We have more options here.”

So, to me, the nest egg calculation, it’s a time value money calculator, that usually gives you this big pot of money that you need. But I think, the special sauce is to kind of discount it back for it, actually means something to me today. And that’s where, I think, great planning can kind of come from there.

[00:33:58] TU: Yeah, and I think one of the things we hear a lot from prospective clients. I know Justin does when he’s talking with folks, and we certainly see the value of this coming to clarity in the planning process, is this is one of those topics for good reason that there’s a lot of anxiety and uneasiness, because it’s a, as we’ve talked about, big number. It’s out in the future. We get into the what if scenarios. What if I don’t have enough? What about this? Am I going to be able to care for my family? Do the things I want to do? And we underestimate, in my opinion, we underestimate the mental toll that that running conversation has in our head. Do I have enough? Will I have enough? What about this? Could we be doing more? And whether we like the numbers, whether we punch this number and we see a thousand, we’re like, “Tim, I’m never working with you again. Don’t show me this number again.” But we have a picture of what’s it going to take each month. And just like we talked about budget and other things, what do we need to do? What do we need to change? Or perhaps nothing to make this goal a reality. So, we’re bringing the unknown, big scary parts of the plan into reality, and something that we can address on a month by month basis, and begin to work a plan if we don’t have it yet in place, that allows us to hopefully make this goal a reality.

[00:35:09] TB: Yeah, it’s so true. And I think that’s why it can be such a cliff to get over, is because when you’re going through this process, you’re setting things up. But idea is that, once you get past the initial setup, life is going to change, and you’re always going to have challenges. But if you know, it’s kind of like what we were talking about, I think before we turned the mic on. If you know in the background, that you’re funding these goals, whether they’re near term or long term, it’s like, that can kind of create scarcity, because you are kind of being very deliberate with how you’re directed money. In the back of your mind, you still know that you’re doing the pay yourself first, or you’re putting those goals that are really important for you and your family at the forefront.

Whereas, if you just throw everything into a pot of money, you’re not clearly distinguishing what are we actually doing? So, to me, that’s super important. A lot of it is like for retirement is, in this case, jacking the employee contribution up 1% or 2%, fixes it, without doing anything else at all. The other thing you could do is just change the allocation to aggressive, and you’re 200 to the to the front side of it. You’re 200 to the good side of it. And that’s what we talk about when we speak about investment, and kind of aggressive Jane and conservative Jane, and kind of highlight in what little tweaks to your portfolio can do. It’s huge. And not doing that, is to your point, can cause that mental bandwidth and kind of caused you to not do anything at all, which is not necessarily good either.

[00:36:49] TU: Yeah, Tim, this is a great start to this series, and starting with a question of how much do I need? And even before that question of where am I going and why am I going in that direction? Right? So, we talked about living a rich life today, making sure we’re taking care of our future selves. And before we talk about, which we’re going to on the next episode, some of the actual X’s and O’s. What are the vehicles that we could use to be able to begin to build this portfolio? So, once we identify, we need three, we need four, we need four and a half, whatever that number is. The next natural question is, “Well, how do I get there? What do I do? What are the options that I have available?” So, we’re going to talk about that on the next episode, but this episode is really about laying the foundation around how much is enough? And what are some of the factors that I may use to begin to make that determination?

Of course, we’re biased, but the team at YFP Planning, whether you’re a new practitioner, whether you’re in the middle of your career, whether you’re nearing retirement, or maybe have already gotten to the point of retirement, our fee only financial planning team of five certified financial planners and our in-house tax team, including a CPA, and an IRS enrolled agent, they’re ready to work with you to build a retirement plan among other financial goals that you’re working on as well.

So, if you’re interested in learning more about our one on one comprehensive financial planning services, you can book a free discovery call. To learn more about that service, determine whether that’s a good fit, and you can do that by scheduling an appointment at yfpplanning.com. Again, that’s yfpplanning.com.

Tim, this wraps up our first four episodes, and we appreciate everyone listening and we’re going to pick back up next week, talking about some of the alphabet soup of retirement accounts. 

[SPONSOR MESSAGE]

[00:38:28] TU: Before we wrap up today’s episode of Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast, I want to again thank our sponsor, the American Pharmacists Association. APhA is every pharmacists’ ally advocating on your behalf for better working conditions, fair PBM practices and more opportunities for pharmacists to provide care. Make sure to join A Bolder APhA to gain premier access to financial educational resources, and to receive discounts on YFP products and services.

You can join APhA at a 25% discount by visiting pharmacist.com/join and using the coupon code YFP. Again, that’s pharmacist.com/join, using the coupon code YFP.

[OUTRO]

[00:39:08] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and it is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. 

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog post and podcast is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analysis expressed herein are solely those of your financial pharmacist unless otherwise noted and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward looking statements, which are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. 

Thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 270: YFP Planning Case Study #3: Financial and Life Considerations As Retirement Nears


YFP Planning Case Study #3: Financial and Life Considerations As Retirement Nears

On this episode, sponsored by Insuring Income, YFP Co-Founder & Director of Financial Planning, Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP® is joined by YFP Planning Lead Planners, Kelly Reddy-Heffner, CFP®, CSLP®, CDFA®, and Robert Lopez, CFP® to discuss a financial planning case study on financial and life considerations as retirement nears.

About Today’s Guests

Kelly Reddy-Heffner, CFP®, CSLP®, CDFA®

Kelly Reddy-Heffner, CFP®, CSLP®, CDFA® is a Lead Planner at YFP Planning. She enjoys time with her husband and two sons, riding her bike, running, and keeping after her pup ‘Fred Rogers.’ Kelly loves to cheer on her favorite team, plan travel, and ironically loves great food but does not enjoy cooking at all. She volunteers in her community as part of the Chambersburg Rotary. Kelly believes that there are no quick fixes to financial confidence, and no guarantees on investment returns, but there is value in seeking trusted advice to get where you want to go. Kelly’s mission is to help clients go confidently toward their happy place.

Robert Lopez, CFP®

Robert Lopez, CFP®, is a Lead Planner at YFP Planning. Along with his team members, Kimberly Bolton, CFP®, and Savannah Nichols, he helps YFP Planning clients on their financial journey to live their best lives. To go along with his CFP® designation, Robert has a B.S. in Finance and an M.S. in Family Financial Planning. Prior to his career in financial planning, Robert worked as an Explosive Ordnance Disposal Technician in the United States Air Force. Although no longer on active duty, he still participates as a member of the Air Force Reserves. When not working, Robert enjoys being outdoors, playing co-ed volleyball and kickball, catching a game of ultimate frisbee, or hiking with his wife Shirley, young son Spencer, and their dogs, Meeko and Willow. 

Episode Summary

In this week’s episode, YFP Co-Founder & Director of Financial Planning, Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP® is joined by YFP Planning Lead Planners, Kelly Reddy-Heffner, CFP®, CSLP®, CDFA® and Robert Lopez, CFP® to walk through this financial planning case study featuring fictitious clients, The Kims, and their financial and life considerations as retirement nears. In this case study, Tim, Kelly, and Robert discuss Andrew and Courtney Kim and their current financial situation as they prepare for retirement in the next three to five years. As members of the “sandwich generation,” the Kims, in their early 60s, have concerns about caring for Andrew’s elderly mother and their adult son, in addition to a long list of financial goals, including saving for their grandchildren’s education. The team discusses how to best approach retirement by evaluating their investments, social security claiming strategies, and the budget to build their retirement paycheck. Robert shares insight on having open discussions with key players when planning for retirement and how Andrew’s mother and their adult son can factor into the timing and budget associated with their retirement. Kelly tackles some challenging questions surrounding long-term care insurance and whether or not having a policy will be a solid financial decision. 

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRODUCTION]

[00:00:00] TB: You’re listening to the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast, a show all about inspiring you, the pharmacy professional on your path towards achieving financial freedom. Hi, I’m Tim Baker and today, I chat with YFP Planning Lead Planners, Kelly Reddy-Heffner and Robert Lopez, to walk through our third case study of a fictitious family, the Kims. The Kims are in their early 60s and are very interested in how to best approach retirement in the next three to five years.

We break down how to best approach retirement question by evaluating their investments, discussing social security’s claiming strategies and looking at their budget in order to approach building their retirement paycheck. We also discuss other issues such as caring for an adult child and an aging parent, and some questions around long-term care insurance. I hope you enjoy this episode. First, let’s hear from our sponsor, and then we’ll jump into the show.

[SPONSOR MESSAGE]

[00:00:50] ANNOUNCER: This week’s podcast episode is brought to you by Insuring Income. Insuring Income is your source for all things term, life insurance and own occupation disability insurance. Insuring Income has a relationship with America’s top-rated term life insurance and disability insurance companies, so pharmacists like you can easily find the best solutions for your personal situation.

To better serve you, Insuring Income reviews all applicable carriers in the marketplace for your desired coverage; supports clients in all 50 states and makes sure all of your questions get answered. To get quotes and apply for term life, or disability insurance, see sample contract from disability carriers, or learn more about these topics, visit insuringincome.com/yourfinancialpharmacist. Again, that’s insuringincome.com/yourfinancialpharmacist.

[EPISODE]

[00:01:41] TB: What’s up, everybody? Welcome back to our case study series. I’m here with Robert Lopez and Kelly Reddy-Heffner. We’re going to be talking about the Kims today. Now in the previous two case studies that we’ve had, we’ve talked about different stages of life, whether it’s a newer pharmacist, a pharmacist that has a younger family that’s trying to work through different issues with college funding.

Today, the Kims, they’re going to be more closer to those years of approaching retirement and really asking those questions about hey, do we have enough? Can we start winding our careers down and look at retirement and more seriously? Robert, Kelly, welcome back to this third installment of the case studies. How’s everything going?

[00:02:25] KRH: Going pretty well. How are you doing, Tim? Welcome back from your –

[00:02:27] TB: Awesome.

[00:02:28] KRH: – sabbatical.

[00:02:29] TB: Yeah, appreciate it. I’m back, energized. I enjoyed the time off. I’m happy to be back. Shaved my head, so I’m in this weird period of, should I shave it again, or not? Yeah, doing fun. How about Robert? How’s everything going with you?

[00:02:42] RL: It’s going pretty good over here. Football season is upon us, so it’s the good time of year.

[00:02:46] TB: Yeah, go Birds. Excited for that. I told my wife, Shay, that we’re back to that time, where Saturdays and Sundays are going to be a little rough in terms of getting anything done. Yeah, I’m excited for football season. It’s actually starting to cool down over the weekend here. We’re in these knees, highs of 70s. Yeah, fall is coming.

Yeah. So let’s jump into it guys. As you guys can see, if you’re watching on YouTube, we share the case study, the fact pattern. Robert is going to kick us off and go through who we’re talking about today. Kelly’s going to go through the goals and some of the debt and I’ll set up the rest of it. We’ll put in protection, some of the tech stuff and some of the facts of the case. Go ahead, Robert. Kick us off here.

[00:03:30] RL: Yeah. Today, we’re going to go over Andrew and Courtney Kim, who are 62 and 60, respectively. Andrew is an operations manager for a defense contractor. He makes $205,000 per year. Courtney is infectious disease pharmacist working for the VA. She makes a $150,000 a year. They file their taxes, married filing jointly. They have two sons, Peter and Logan. Peter is a software engineer, 32, married, two kids, living in San Francisco. Logan actually is living back at the house. He’s 30-years-old, but he recently lost his job and is staying with parents for now. They live in Portland, Oregon. They have a combined gross income of $355,000, which breaks down monthly to $29,583. Their net, which is after taxes and contributions to retirement plans and insurance is $11,795.

They have expenses that break down as $3,500 for fixed expenses, $2,600 for variable expenses, and about $5,600 going to savings, which is better than the 50-30-20 that we aim for, and it’s closer to a 30-22-47. They live in a four-bedroom single-family house they purchased back in ’86 for a $105,000, which is where it’s worth well more now. Is completely paid off. Andrew’s mother who’s 82 lives about an hour away, but that may be changing in the near future based on her health concerns.

[00:04:50] KRH: Of course, as they approach this next transition phase, thinking through some of their goals, so they both are interested in retiring in the next three to five years. Hey want to make sure that they have enough and also, see what their Social Security benefit will be as part of that retirement nest egg and what they have available. Thinking about downsizing. That’s a common conversation. Also, with Logan back in the house and not sure about where mom may need to be residing and what assistance she will need, that’s a consideration. They also have another son and grandchildren in California. Want to make sure insurance is squared away. There may be a time with a gap in health insurance. Understanding what that means before they can be on Medicare.

They want to focus on some more leisure and do the traveling, see the people, do the national parks. Then, they also want to make sure that they can take care of mom and that their children are in okay shape as well, and maybe save some money for the grandchildren’s education in the future. As we start looking at strategy, they also have some debt. They do not have mortgage debt, so that has been paid off in the last year as Robert mentioned. They do have a car note, the very fun Tesla, which has balance.

[00:06:15] RL: You know a little bit about that. Yeah.

[00:06:17] KRH: I do know a little bit about that. Yeah. That apparently, pre-retirement, you need to get the fun car and then have to take care of it. 35,000 left on that car note at 4.5% interest. Then, they took out some private loans for Logan’s education, currently at a 6.75% interest rate with four years left, and that balance is about $24,000.

[00:06:42] RL: Yeah. As we look at the wealth building stuff and be jumping back and forth between this and the net worth statement. Their cash in checking and savings is right about a $100,000, which is they’re probably a little bit over funded there, given the expenses that Robert laid that in 401k that he has with his defense contractor job, he’s putting in 13.2%, which is about $27,000, which is what he can put in $20,500. Then after age 50, you can put the extra 65 in it, $6,500 there. $27,000 is what he’s putting in, plus a 6% match that he gets from his employer. It’s right now invested in target date funds for 2035.

Courtney has a TSP from the VA. She’s has in the middle of the VA long, where we received in the last couple of years. Her pension stuff can probably be similar to what we see with a lot of our clients with regard to that. She’s putting in 18%, which is $27,000. Plus, she gets a 5% match. She’s in basically, 50% CE fund, and 50% iFund, so all equity. Common stock and international companies. She has an old 401k that she hasn’t looked at for a while that has about $165,000 that we have to figure out what to do with that.

Taxable account, joint taxable account has about a $135,000 that they’re putting in $500 a month. It’s currently with an advisor that they speak with infrequently. Mostly C-class mutual funds in an 80$-20% mix. Probably some expense there that we’re not seeing that might be eroding some of the gains. A joint savings account, like I said, that they’re putting $600. This was the $600 a month. This was the mortgage payment, minus some property taxes. IRA is hanging out there, Roth IRAs, 35,000 for Courtney, 85,000 for Andrew that’s managed by that advisor, all equity institutional funds. Probably being charge a fee on that.

All in all, between cash and the investments, and then the value of the house, about 2 million dollars in assets. 2.1 million dollars in assets, so it gives them a total – if you subtract about the $60,000 in liabilities, about 2.036 in net worth million. 2.03 6 million in net worth. In terms of the wealth protection, they both have a term policy use, $500,000, some group life insurance from their employers, both set to expire. They’re their own policies in three years, so at 65 for Andrew and 63 for Courtney. They have some short-term and long-term disability, own occupation through their employers.

Courtney carries a professional liability coverage. Then from the state perspective, they have a will, but it hasn’t been updated in a long time, 20 years. Living well and power of attorneys also need to be updated. There’s some concern about Andrew, mom, if she has the right documents and how that’s going to affect their financial plan. Taxes, they’re doing it themselves right now through TurboTax, concerned about gains on the house if it’s sold. They would like to pay a lot less property tax in the future, which is also one of the reasons that they’re looking to downsize. Concerned about taxes when they take money out of their traditional investment accounts. Just how to best spend down those accounts without being killed in taxes.

Some miscellaneous stuff. They’re both in good health. Andrew thinks that they should take security ASAP, because he doesn’t want to lose out. There’s this idea that I want to get everything, every nickel that I put back in, so it’s definitely a point of conversation that we need to have. Not sure if they should move out of the state, or to a retirement community. Obviously, with the concerns with Andrew’s mother close by, and then should they go to a different state with family in California? Should they phase into retirement? Tougher with the VA, but Andrew could consult, be a contractor with his employer. Then Courtney is very worried about running out of money. “We’d rather be safe than sorry. I would rather work two more years if needed to retire to make sure that the money doesn’t run out.”

That is the facts of the case here, guys. I guess, if we look at goal number one, they want to retire in the next three to five years. If the Kims were our clients, what is the best way? Kelly, I’ll start with you. What is the best way to start breaking down that question of, hey, are we on track to be able to retire comfortably and have the money last in the next three to five years?

[00:10:52] KRH: Usually, what we would do is start with a nest egg, just taking a quick look at what assets they have available, time interval for when they want to retire. You can get a Social Security statement from the Social Security website. It would be good for them to download that data, so that we can see what their monthly and annual amounts will be. There are differences in that amount, based on the timeframe when they take the Social Security. There’s a difference between taking it early, taking it out for retirement age.

I’m guessing with their age range, it’s 67 and some change would be for retirement age. There’s also estimates at age 70. Sometimes age 70 can be a lot more advantageous than even full retirement age. It’s good to run the numbers and take a look. The nest egg gives a good high-level, like, how do things look in terms of being prepared for retirement? Then we also use software with e-money to take a look at a little bit more granular detail spending data. That was one of the things that we had talked about previously in preparing for this is, if they spend a little bit less in retirement, make some changes, it really will have a big impact on overall what they can do. E-money allows us to model different spending scenarios and take a look at what the cashflow is.

[00:12:23] TB: Yeah. I think, the big thing is it’s obviously looking at what they have, their investments, but then also, what is the potential drawdown rate, or withdrawal rate? A lot of people are familiar with the 4% rule, which is a general rule of thumb that if you have a million-dollar portfolio, and you basically take 4% out every year, $40,000, a lot of the math says that that can support 30 years of living off of that. There’s a lot of different ways to do it.

I think, let’s talk a little bit more about the Social Security statement. You mentioned that and I think that’s one of the things that we see that can often be influenced by what you read in the news, what your maybe colleagues have done. Like, they go to retire. Robert, how do you approach the conversation of when, because a lot of the times, a client already has their mind made up about Social Security.

It’s interesting, Morningstar did a study. They said that and a good advisor can basically add something like 30% more to your income in retirement. 9% of that, the biggest chunk of that is proper social security claiming strategies. How would you broach that subject with a client, particularly if they have their mind made up, in this case, Andrew, is saying, “Hey, we need to claim as soon as possible.” Walk me through your approach with that.

[00:13:46] RL: I think, one of the biggest things that you can do for a client is really just showing them all the data. That Social Security statement that you can pull from ssa.gov that Kelly mentioned, really has all that laid out. Now, when we look at Andrew and Courtney here, they look like they’ve probably been maxing out Social Security. Meaning, they’re putting in the most amount that they can per year. In 2022, if he draws now, if you were to retire today and draw, maximum withdrawal at 62 is $2,364 a month. If you were to wait until age 70, that draw would increase to $4,194 a month.

Really showing that differentiator there of this is 1,800 additional dollars per month that you would get by waiting. Then, if he just waits until full retirement, age to 67, then that is $3,345. Nice, in the middle of difference. Really showing them how that would work. Now, for their case, specifically, if they already have their minds made up and say, “Hey, I want to do this.” He says, “Hey, I want to retire in three to five years. I want to draw as early as I can.” Well, just as early as I can mean he wants to draw today and continue working? Because then, we can show the tax consequences of those dollars. How much tax are we going to be paying on the Social Security dollars if he’s continuing to work?

If he’s not going to continue to work and we’re going to wait, say three years and draw at 65, which is still before his defined for retirement age, then we’re not going to be taxed on the majority that that amount as long as she’s not working either. We can show, does this math work, right? Their expenses are not as high as they may believe that they are, because they’re saving a lot of money. If we double up both their Social Security at age 65, maybe she worked for two years longer than he does, so they’re both retire at 65. That solves both of them.

He wants to draw as soon as possible. She wants to maybe work a few extra years to make sure that they get the value, then their social security draw would be the same, but you would need to understand that if something were to happen, they lose one of those securities, right? It’s not that you would get the other person’s. If we were to wait, and we can show this benefit of it for Andrew, we say, wait until age 70 and we’re getting that $4,194, if he were to pass away, then Courtney would take over his larger payment.

[00:15:47] TB: Correct. Yup.

[00:15:48] RL: That’s generally an argument that we can make is whoever was the highest earner, we want to wait the longest amount of time, so that we can get the benefit of those multipliers on the years after full retirement age. The highest amount would be age 70 at this point in time.

[00:16:01] TB: One of the biggest things that we’re trying to solve in retirement is making sure that the money doesn’t run out for the amount of years that we’re going to be alive, which we just don’t know what that is. It’s an educated guess. I think, one of the things that a lot of people and Andrew is showing this like, the sooner the better, because that’s when I get the paycheck. For someone like him who’s the higher earner in the fact pattern, he’s right now making $205,000, Courtney’s making a $150,000 as the infectious disease pharmacist, his Social Security is probably going to be higher at a baseline. It might make sense, although he might be the first to pass away.

I think, probably some questions about Andrew’s mother is alive. She’s 82. Some history of the family, when did Andrew’s father passed away might play a part in this. To your point, when one of the spouses pass away, you basically have the choice. You can either take Andrew, which is probably going to be higher. Or if it does, in fact, be the case that Courtney should just keep hers. At the same breath, you’re still losing the stream of income that you didn’t have. Most of the time, a lot of the time, your expenses don’t basically get chopped in half when the other person’s no longer living. You still have all those fixed expenses, maybe food and things go down like that.

To really combat against this mortality risk of okay, how do we prevent money from not basically being completely spent down, Social Security is going to be one of the biggest attributes for that. With this particular type of client, it’s going to be a smaller percentage of the income, just because they make more money, and Social Security’s going to be capped at a certain amount of income. It’s really important to make a smart claim and decision with regard to the Social Security.

To your point, pulling the Social Security statement, I think, probably I would make sure that they both go through and look at their work years, and the earnings tax for Social Security, to make sure that that is accurate. Sometimes that can be inaccurate. Just seeing what their current benefit is at, it basically outlines from 62 to full retirement age, because they’re both born after 1960. It’s going to be, basically, 67 is full retirement age. Then how does that change by percentage if we can lock in income if we wait to age 70? Then, it shows that in the benefit calculator estimate.

Social Security website is actually pretty good, and be able to basically pull down those statements in real-time, I think is going to be solid. The way that social security is calculated is it takes your 35 most-highest paid years to make that calculation, which is another reason why potentially phasing into retirement, or delaying retirement is going to be a big tool to make sure that, because we might log another year where they’re earning six figures, which maybe they didn’t do that early in the career.

We look at the nest egg. We might look at some of the spending. Kelly, how do you approach looking at this? Because unfortunately, it comes back to the B word, which is budget. How do you actually walk clients through that and try to project what they actually will need from their retirement accounts? What does that look like in practice?

[00:19:18] KRH: I mean, that’s a great question. The nest egg does an estimator. Do 70, 80, 90, 100. In this case, seeing that their expenses were lower, the nest egg worked estimating lower expenses. I guess, from there, the question would be, if you estimated 50% of expenses for each side, I lean towards having the numbers in place, so that people can see, this is actually what this looks like. We do have a spending budget template and then we also can do things again in e-money, where there is an expense section where you can add in different anticipated expenses.

We see some go away. They’re not going to be making retirement contributions, if they’re fully retired. In this case study, it will be interesting and would be a conversation with the client. Although, I suspect that they would ask it back to us, to answer with Logan and mom, what can they afford to do? It is an interesting time period and not all that uncommon for kids to be in an age where they still need a little bit of assistance in trying to define what that is and what you can afford to do for them and with them. The circumstances, unfortunate with Logan, but I think it is worth having the conversation about. It is still a private student loan on the balance sheet. It is him in their household, what is he contributing? How long? Have they set some parameters for what they’re willing to do, and then us helping them figure out what they can possibly afford to do, if they are interested in downsizing, which is on that goal list.

Mom is a whole another host of questions. Understanding what resources she has available. Then trying to figure out what really they could afford to help her to do. I mean, I think the actual numbers are pretty helpful to see, especially when you do have other family members involved and really be as detailed as you can about what the budget might look like.

[00:21:35] TB: Yeah. I think, it’s one thing to fill out a spreadsheet, it’s like, okay, I think this is what we pay for food, or this is what we pay for utilities, or travel. Then, I think if you actually link it to credit cards and debit cards and savings accounts, checking accounts, typically, there’s a lot more there that we don’t necessarily account for. I think, probably it’s a good exercise to do both, and then compare. I think, there’s some planners out there that they’ll look at, hey, how much money came in for year 2021. They basically say, “This is what I need to plan.”

I almost build a paycheck with just the same thing in mind, even going into retirement. A lot of what we typically do with the nest egg, is we discount it by a certain amount, because we’re not going to be saving, in this case, 13% for Andrew for his 401k, and 18% for Courtney’s TSP. There’s a discount just in that alone. It comes back to that. It’s like, it’s the building block of how we need to be able to disperse. Once we made that decision with Social Security, what’s the gap?

Obviously, it’s going to be in phases. If they do retire at 65, maybe we draw down the investment portfolio a lot more aggressively, until we get to a delayed Social Security at 68, 69, even 70. Then that picks up and we let the investments take a little bit of a breather for that. In terms of this idea of sandwich, the sandwich generation. That’s where there’s a household that’s basically, they’re taking care of themselves, or trying to, but then they’re also taking care of a parent, and then an adult child. Tough conversations, guys. Robert how do you begin to have that in terms of like, “Hey, we need to take care of number one, which is you, versus, hey, I know, this is really important to you.” Because the other thing is they’re also talking about education for their grandkids. How do we begin to dissect that part of their financial plan?

[00:23:32] RL: I want to start off by saying, I’ve never heard the term ‘sandwich generation’. Since Kelly’s a member of that generation, I think it’s very interesting.

[00:23:40] KRH: I’m not 60 yet.

[00:23:44] RL: Generational. Generational. No, I think having that conversation with Logan is the most important part, right? We don’t know what he’s professionalized in this scenario. He says, he lost his job recently and had to move back in with mom and dad. Is he an engineer like his brother? Is he a developer? Is he a starving artist? What’s going on here? How does that really work out? Laying it out.

We can’t be the centers of the universe forever. They’re parents, so they want to take care of their kids. They want to help the generation after them, but they can’t take care of everybody all at once. Really coming to terms with that. Letting the kids know. Logan might be very open to understanding of, “Hey, mom and dad want to retire in the next year or two. We really need you to be on your own. Hey, grandma is not doing so well. She’s going to need your room, bud. You’re 30-years-old. It’s time for you to figure it out.” Really laying it out, I think would do well.

Then having that conversation with Peter as well. Peter may already have retirement – I’m sorry. Education savings for his kids set up. Those kids may have another set of grandparents that are also trying to set up accounts and everything. Again, they don’t have to be the center of the universe. They need to be center of their own world and make sure that they’re taking care of themselves, numero uno.

[00:24:53] TB: Yeah, they might be like, again, we’re not trying to solve everything right away. If this listed as the number five, the last goal, it might be that, let’s get the – let’s figure out the debt, which the debt isn’t bad. I think, there’s a question of, do we just take some of the cash that we have, the $100,000 between checking and savings and apply that to the $59,000 that we have between the Tesla and the private loans, and private loans between the six and three quarters, the Tesla being 4.50%. Clear the board there.

Then we start looking at as we get the expense information in a little bit better, if 65 is the goal, which is what I would be pushing for, because that’s when Medicare starts. There’s not necessarily a gap in that regard from a healthcare perspective. Maybe it’s like, your, your will is actually set to bequeath some of that money to grandkids. Obviously, there’s in Oregon, you can get some tax advantages if you’re putting money into a 529 today. It’s minimal. I think those things are possible, but I think we take it in bite sizes.

I agree with you. I think it’s like, had that discussion with Logan, have that discussion with mom and see where she’s at in terms of – because that’s, a lot of moms do not want to move back in. That can be a struggle, just to make sure that they’re getting care, but there can be that loss of independence if they’re now living with you, or if they have to go live in assisted living, or things like that.

I think, it’s level setting those expectations. Like what we always say, even with the education piece, you can’t take retirement loans. You can take student loans and other things, but eventually, someone like Logan has to figure it out and do their thing. That can be a very strong pull on the financials.

In terms of this idea of long-term care insurance. I guess, what’s your guys take on that, as they’re right in that age, where the challenge here is time in, if and when to actually purchase these policies. The sweet spot is usually 60 to 65. Some people say 50. The problem is, if you purchase that 50, you could be paying these premiums that go up regularly for 30, 40 years, before you even have the – you make a claim. I guess, what’s your guys’s takes on the long-term care insurance question that they have in terms of looking at policies and purchasing them for in the event that they need some assistance in that regard? Kelly, what do you think?

[00:27:24] KRH: This is a hard question, I think with the long-term care insurance, I’m going to be honest.

[00:27:28] TB: I agree.

[00:27:30] KRH: On the one hand, right, if you’re going to pay premiums for a long time, it may add up that you have paid more in premiums than what you’re going to get out of it. Care is expensive. It does involve a little bit of personality and understanding what people’s expectations are, too.

If you have someone who is like, “I am never leaving my house. I don’t want people in my house helping me.” I mean that personality would be hard to justify a long-term care policy, because they are going to be very resistant to using what you would get from it. But the care costs are expensive. At some point, that certainly should be a conversation piece, like how much could be anticipated in that cost, with all insurance products. It’s a tradeoff between paying a premium to have somebody else cover an amount that you cannot pay for out of pocket for a recovery that you would like to have in the event that something happens. Or you’re paying out of pocket. Like, you have enough resources to take care of the care that you have in your mind, that you want to have happen.

In the e-money data, we do usually build in two years at the end of assuming some type of substantial care is needed in those last two years. That data can help answer this question to see like, what would that cost be? It’ll project it out in future dollars and give a very realistic, like this could be what you would have to face. I mean, certainly things happen where care is needed ahead of those last two years. It can be a combination. Certainly, the quality of the long-term care product would be a big piece. Can you get in-home care as part of it, if that is what is desirable? There’s a lot of nuances.

The person that helps give some quotes for some of the life and disability. They do some of the long-term care insurance as well, so we sometimes will talk to them about some of these questions and see scenarios where it makes sense. Again, personality, cost, what’s the alternative if you don’t have it? Sometimes it’s a completely opposite, which is spending down and trying to figure out a strategy to not have so many sources.

[00:30:02] TB: Medicaid, right? Yeah.

[00:30:03] KRH: Right. Then are you okay with what that care looks like in your area where you might be receiving care? Those are all very difficult questions to answer. If the cash flow is good, and it makes sense to do it, and it’s affordable and you’re in that sweet spot. If you’re on the conservative side, you might lean towards doing it. If you like more risk, or more adverse to accepting care, it might not be as big of a priority.

[00:30:37] TB: When we talk about long-term care, that’s really – it’s insurance that provides assistance, usually through assisted living, a nursing home care, home health care. Sometimes personal, or adult day care for individuals, 65 or older that have a chronic or disabling. This is typically people that are having trouble using the bathroom, dressing themselves, feeding themselves, that type of thing. They did a study in 2020 that the average cost, the current medium annual costs for assisted living is $51,600. For an in-home health aide is 50, almost $55,000. For a private room in a nursing home, it’s a $106,000, which obviously, can be a pretty big chunk of that investment portfolio.

However, about 80% of long-term care is provided at home by unpaid family members. That’s where you might say, “Hey, Peter. What’s the plan for this?” I know conversations with my parents, they don’t want us to have to really have to deal with that. They rather have some care by something that they’re paying for. I think, it’s just family-to-family. A lot of a lot of families, you’re it, and that might be the case with Andrew and his mom is that it’s more of a self-insured type of thing.

As we know with most things, the price of this type of care is going up and as are the premiums for these type of policies. That’s the challenge. I know, some of the people that we wrote policies at my last firm is that they would buy these policies, and then a couple years later, the premiums would go up 10%, 20%, and they would let them last. I’m just going to go at it on my own. It’s really a personal decision in terms of what your strategy is, and how you want to attack it, but it’s definitely something that I think we as fiduciaries need to see what comes back from the client in terms of their approach. It’s a tough one. I’m with you. How about Robert, do you have anything to add to that?

[00:32:39] RL: No. I think you guys did a really good job on that one.

[00:32:42] TB: We talked about the insurance. Any other gaps and the protection? Obviously, I think one of the things, Robert, that we should be looking at is just the estate stuff, and making sure that that is all updated and good to go. Probably start to look at the mom stuff, too, right?

[00:32:57] RL: Definitely. Obviously, if you have an estate plan that was drawn up 20 years ago, there’s going to be some things that have shifted, or changed. In that meantime, your boys were 10 and 12. Best at that point, maybe you want one of them to be your power of attorney, or your health care proxy. Maybe you want a different family member to be that executor. Maybe you want to pass things along differently now that you have grandkids that you definitely didn’t even imagine at that point in time when your kids were in middle school.

Then definitely, mom, we really want to understand what mom has going on. Is she independently wealthy, and she’s never going to live with us by choice? Does she have a bunch of heirlooms that she wants to pass along? Does she have her wishes laid out in order? Or do you know them? Because Andrew is going to be in charge of those decision-making questions. When the doctors ask, what does she want in this situation? You’re going to have to know the answer or you’re going to have to have that document to provide.

Really having those conversations, or those legal discussions would be really valuable ahead of time. Most people, when we think about estate planning, it’s because we don’t want to become a burden to our family. We don’t want to be troublesome in that situation. We want to lay out as much as we can, beforehand. She may have all that flushed out in a folder ready to go. She may have none of those documents, hopes and dreams that she’s going to live to 200. It’s really important to understand where everyone lies on that and have really honest and open conversations.

[00:34:14] TB: Yeah, I agree. I think that’s probably a big risk that can be easily mitigated by just now with an attorney and writing those things out and just keeping it fresh in that regard. Probably, the only other thing that I would address, I think, there was concern about gains on the house that they sell that. I know a lot of that gain is going to be excluded, probably half a million, if they’re filing their taxes together. There might be some gain that they will have to realize and plan for. If they basically downsize to a property, they might be able to exclude some of that as well. I think, probably working with a tax person as they’re approaching retirement would be good.

I think, the only other big concern here guys that I have, would be just looking at the overall investment allocation. We’re saying that a lot of it’s an equity. There’s probably not a lot in bonds, 80-20 in the taxable account. They’re approaching the eye of the storm with regard to the – if they’re looking to retire in three to five years, really, that’s probably the one time in their entire investment lies, where they probably need to be as conservative as they will ever be. What we’re really trying to mitigate here is sequence of return risk. This is basically where the market corrects, or we’re in a recession, it goes down 20%, or 30%, and then your withdrawal and $40,000 out of that. That typically leads to unsustainable and rates of failure with regard to pulling money from the portfolio.

As you’re approaching that eye of the storm, so to speak, instead of having an 80-20 or 100-0, we really need to be closer to maybe a 60-40, 50-50 to make sure that we’re protecting the things that we’ve grew over the course of their career. Then as we come out of the eyes of the storm when they’re in their 70s, and so on, maybe we get a little bit more aggressive, because we have it figured out and we’re looking more towards making sure it’s long-term. There’s lots of different ways to look at that, whether it’s a systemic withdrawal, a function approach, or something similar to that.

That probably would be to look at the investments in totality and making sure that for these last couple years, we’re looking more from a safety perspective, versus let’s try to get the portfolio as big as we can.

Guys, I think that’s probably a pretty good place to start. I think, for this one, more questions than answers. I think that’s a good thing. I appreciate the look at this case study with the Kims and looking forward to next time.

[00:36:45] RL: Sounds good. Looking forward to it.

[END OF EPISODE]

[00:36:47] ANNOUNCER: Before we wrap up today’s show, let’s hear an important message from our sponsor, Insuring Income.

If you are in the market to add own occupation, disability insurance, term life insurance, or both, Insuring Income would love to be a resource. Insuring Income has relationships with all of the high-quality disability insurance and life insurance carriers you should be considering and can help you design coverage to best protect you and your family.

Head over to insuringincome.com/yourfinancialpharmacist, or click on the link in the show notes to request quotes, ask a question, or start down your own path of learning more about this necessary protection.

[DISCLAIMER]

[00:37:23] ANNOUNCER: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding material should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment.

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of Your Financial Pharmacists, unless otherwise noted, and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward-looking statements, which are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements.

For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. Thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 261: YFP Planning Case Study #2: Planning for Retirement, Saving for Kids’ College, and Paying Off Debt


YFP Planning Case Study #2: Planning for Retirement, Saving for Kids’ College, and Paying Off Debt

On this episode, sponsored by Insuring Income, YFP Co-Founder & Director of Financial Planning, Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP® is joined by YFP Planning Lead Planners, Kelly Reddy-Heffner, CFP®, CSLP®, CDFA®, and Robert Lopez, CFP® to walk you through a financial planning case study on planning for retirement, saving for kids’ college, and paying off debt.

About Today’s Guests

Kelly Reddy-Heffner, CFP®, CSLP®, CDFA®

Kelly Reddy-Heffner, CFP®, CSLP®, CDFA® is a Lead Planner at YFP Planning. She enjoys time with her husband and two sons, riding her bike, running, and keeping after her pup ‘Fred Rogers.’ Kelly loves to cheer on her favorite team, plan travel, and ironically loves great food but does not enjoy cooking at all. She volunteers in her community as part of the Chambersburg Rotary. Kelly believes that there are no quick fixes to financial confidence, and no guarantees on investment returns, but there is value in seeking trusted advice to get where you want to go. Kelly’s mission is to help clients go confidently toward their happy place.

Robert Lopez, CFP®

Robert Lopez, CFP®, is a Lead Planner at YFP Planning. Along with his team members, Kimberly Bolton, CFP®, and Savannah Nichols, he helps YFP Planning clients on their financial journey to live their best lives. To go along with his CFP® designation, Robert has a B.S. in Finance and an M.S. in Family Financial Planning. Prior to his career in financial planning, Robert worked as an Explosive Ordnance Disposal Technician in the United States Air Force. Although no longer on active duty, he still participates as a member of the Air Force Reserves. When not working, Robert enjoys being outdoors, playing co-ed volleyball and kickball, catching a game of ultimate frisbee, or hiking with his wife Shirley, young son Spencer, and their dogs, Meeko and Willow. 

Episode Summary

What are your retirement goals, and do your investments align with your vision of the future? Welcome to another episode of Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. YFP Co-Founder & Director of Financial Planning, Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP® is joined by YFP Planning Lead Planners, Kelly Reddy-Heffner, CFP®, CSLP®, CDFA®, and Robert Lopez, CFP®, to walk you through a financial planning case study on planning for retirement, saving for kids’ college, and paying off debt. This is our second case study, and this time we hone in on the lives of a fictitious couple, Fiona and Rob Anderson. We examine their financial portfolios, from salaries and debt to their investment accounts and insurance policies. Listeners will learn about Rob and Fiona’s retirement goals and whether they have invested in the right ways to achieve them. The problem of conflicting goals rises to the surface, and Kelly and Robert share how you can manage to prioritize your children’s college education with your own retirement plan. Kelly and Robert touch on innovative ways to spend less on college while giving us invaluable advice on making your investments work for you. Delaying your retirement and waiting to claim your Social Security are helpful methods in ensuring cash flow during retirement. Finally, we get a glimpse at what paying a mortgage during retirement is like, and whether there is reason to panic.

Key Points From This Episode

  • Getting to know Fiona and Rob Anderson. 
  • The home, work, and financial portfolios of our case study couple. 
  • Fiona and Rob’s investment accounts and insurance policies. 
  • Diving into tax concerns.
  • Your children’s education versus building your retirement fund – conflicting goals. 
  • How to prioritize conflicting goals.
  • Some innovative ways to lower the costs of college/university.
  • How to use 401Ks, RSUs, and other investment accounts wisely, for investing in your goals. 
  • Delaying retirement and waiting to claim Social Security. 
  • A closer look at whether their particular investment accounts work for their specific goals. 
  • Unpacking the target date fund and traditional IRA. 
  • What to consider when paying a mortgage in retirement.
  • Your age concerning your debt, and if there is reason to panic.

Highlights

“You can take out loans for school, but you can’t take out loans for your own retirement. So make sure you take care of yourself first.” —Robert Lopez, CFP® [0:08:20]

“It’s really like golden handcuffs. It’s a way for a company to make sure that you’re not going to want to leave, ‘Hey, here’s this money, but you have to stay here to get it.’” — Robert Lopez, CFP® [0:18:25]

“Taking those dollars that you feel are being wasted and putting them towards something that you actually feel pain over, is huge.” — Robert Lopez, CFP® [0:21:00]

“Things happen unexpectedly. So, having your documents in place is important, and it makes it a lot simpler and less chaotic.” — Kelly Reddy-Heffner, CFP®, CSLP®, CDFA® [0:24:20]

“The emotional variable, I can’t calculate for.” —Robert Lopez, CFP® [0:32:12]

“‘Money is power.’ But money is not power. Options are power. Having the option to do different things, and having the ability to make different plans is powerful.” — Robert Lopez, CFP® [0:35:02]

“The best plan is one that works. As long as it works for them, then they made the right choice.” — Robert Lopez, CFP® [0:35:16]

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRODUCTION]

[00:00:00] TB: You’re listening to the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast, a show all about inspiring you, the pharmacy professional, on your path towards achieving financial freedom. Hi, I’m Tim Baker, and we’re back with the Case Studies, this time with the Andersons. I sit down with YFP Planning’s Lead Planners, Kelly Reddy-Heffner and Robert Lopez, to walk through this fictitious family and their financial plan.

Although the Anderson’s are not an actual couple we work with, they are really a composite of clients that we do work with in reality. The first part of the discussion, we lay the groundwork of the Anderson’s jobs and salary situations, where they live. We walk through their net worth and point out important elements of their financial situation. We also talk about their goals and what they’re trying to achieve.

We then talk back and forth about their financial situation. One of the big focuses being on education versus retirement planning and how to best use their investments going forward. This is a bit of the behind the scenes look at what goes on at YFP Planning. I hope you enjoy this episode, but first, let’s hear from our sponsor and we’ll jump into the show.

[SPONSOR MESSAGE]

[00:00:58] ANNOUNCER: This week’s podcast episode is brought to you by Insuring Income. Insuring Income is your source for all things term-life insurance and own-occupation disability Insurance. Insuring Income has a relationship with America’s top rated term Life Insurance and Disability Insurance Company. So pharmacists like you can easily find the best solutions for your personal situation. To better serve you, Insuring Income reviews all applicable carriers in the marketplace for your desired coverage, supports clients in all 50 states and makes sure all of your questions get answered. 

To get quotes and apply for term life or disability insurance, see sample contracts from disability carriers or learn more about these topics. Visit insuringincome.com/yourfinancialpharmacist. Again that’s insuringincome.com/yourfinancialpharmacist.

[EPISODE]

[00:01:50] TB:  What’s up, everybody? Welcome back to YFP Planning, case study number two. The last time, if we remember our first case study, which I thought was smooth, looked at the Joneses. This time, we’re looking at YFP Planning case study number two, the Anderson’s. The Anderson’s that are a little bit different stage of life, but I’m excited to jump in with my colleagues Robert Lopez and Kelly Reddy-Heffner. Guys ,what’s going on? How are things going where you’re at?

[00:02:15] KRH: Good. 

[00:02:16] RL: Yeah. It’s 105 today, so—

[00:02:19] TB: 105 in Phoenix. Kelly, you are, I’m sure, all in on this case study, not imagining sitting on the beach next week.

[00:02:26] KRH: That’s right. I am totally all in. Not distracted at all, but excited to talk through people in mid-stage.

[00:02:34] TB: Awesome. All good. So, Robert, same as last time. Why don’t you set up and, for those listening on the podcast, we are releasing these on video, so you should be able to see us talk through our one page overview of the Anderson’s. Robert is going to set us up in terms of salaries and things like that. Kelly is going to get into goals and debt, and then I’ll take us home, and then we’ll open it up for discussion and go from there. So, Robert, why don’t you take us away?

[00:02:58] RL: Yeah. So, today we’re working with Fiona and Roy Anderson. Fiona is Field Medical Director. She’s 46 years old, making $155,000 a year. Roy is a Pharmacy Manager, 48 years old, making 135. They’re married, filing jointly. They have two sons, Michael and Paul, aged 16 and 14 respectively. They live in Jersey City, New Jersey. Their gross income works out to about $290,000 a year, which breaks down to around $24,000 monthly. Their net, or what they actually receive in their bank accounts, is about $12,000 a month. Their fixed expenses are $6,300, variable expenses of $2,200, and then about $3,300 of monthly savings. They live and own a three bedroom, a single family house. They purchased in 2008, which they got for $420,000 using a conventional 20 percent down at a 6 percent interest rate. Then, in 2015, they’re able to refinance to a 4 percent, 30 year fixed mortgage.

[00:03:56] KRH: Then they have a few goals that they want to accomplish while we’re working together, hypothetically. They want to pay for the four years of undergrad for Michael and Paul. They are making 529 contributions, which they recently increased. They have a pretty robust amount in the account baseline. They want to know if they’ll have enough to accomplish that. Concurrently, they want to try to retire in the next ten to 15 years. One thing to consider is, with the home that they currently own, they want to downsize and move to Florida. Then they are concerned about some of the debt that they still have, as well. So, that debt is listed out as a home equity line of credit that has a 5 percent interest rate.

They remodeled their kitchen and are paying $1,000 a month on that. They still have car loans. They pay a total of 750 interest rates between 3.5 and 4.25 when the two car notes. They still have their own student loans, which is always an interesting intersection with paying your own children’s college tuition as well. They refinance to a ten year private loan, 4.25 percent five years ago. Then, of course, they have the mortgage. So it’s a 30 year fixed 4 percent interest rate after that refi. They’re seven years in and they’re paying 2,500 a month.

[00:05:21] TB: Then, from the wealth building side, they have some cash in the bank, $20 grand in checking, $50 grand in savings, but in terms of their investments they’re looking at 401K, so they both currently have 401K that they’re contributing 4 percent each, plus a 4 percent employer match, so basically 8 percent in total. They’re both invested in the 2035 target date funds. Fiona has an old 401K, a small one at $15,000 that she hasn’t really looked at. They do have a 529 account that they’re increased their contributions lately to $1,0LL, so $500 for each son, so $12,000 a year to get to that goal. Unfortunately, they don’t get an income tax deduction, because in New Jersey if you make more than $200,000 it’s off the table.

They do have a taxable account which is basically Fiona’s RSU, so stock units as part of her compensation, which we see in a lot of Industry Pharmacists. We’ll get that as part of their comp. She has $125,000 that it’s currently sitting in there, all in the company stock, and then they have a joint savings account that they’re putting a hundred bucks a month in, to consider the rainy day.

Michael graduation trip, when you graduate high school, and then a traditional IRA that they’re funding for Fiona in a balanced fund. That is basically their investment accounts. Roy also has a Roth IRA that has about $36,000 in it that he’s not contributing to. It’s sitting there presently. 

From a wealth protection, so this is typically where we talk about insurance, in a state, they each have a 20 year term, $1 million policy that they purchased five years ago, plus a little bit of group life insurance that basically matches their salaries, $150,000, $135,000 respectively. They both have short term and long term disability which has a benefit of 60 percent. That’s going occupation for two years, then any act after that. Roy carries his own professional liability policy. Then, they have a will that was done when Michael was born, so basically 15, 16 years ago. A living will or trust, power of attorney that needs to be updated.

From a tax perspective, they currently use an accountant, but they’re not sure they’re maximizing their deductions. They recognize that New Jersey state income tax and property taxes are killing them, which is why a lot of people from New Jersey moved to Florida. It’s not as bad. They typically owe taxes every year, so they’re basically reached in their pocket for that. One of the big tax concerns they have is that with Fiona’s RSUs, they’re worried about capital gains on that and not really sure what to use that for. 

Some other things are conflicted about how much to put towards college versus their own retirement. Can they retire in 15 years? In retirement, they’re really looking to up their travel game a little bit more. So I guess, I’ll pose the question to the group here when you guys look at the Anderson’s, Fiona and Roy, what are some major things that stick out to you when you’re approaching them in terms of their financial plan?

[00:08:08] RL: Yeah. The first two goals that they have are conflicting here. So they want to pay for education for the boys, but they also want to make sure they’re setting themselves up for retirement. One of the phrases that you’ll hear a lot through financial conversations is, “You can take out loans for school, but you can’t take out loans for your own retirement. So make sure you take care of yourself first.” I think they’ve done a really good job with that so far. They’ve saved a lot in their 401K. They’ve set aside money for the boys at the same time, but now it’s really deciding on how to be important about that and how to be decisive. 

The 4 percent that they’re doing into their retirement accounts, plus 4 percent of a match is good, but not where we’d like to be. Ideally, we want to meet at least 10 percent, and I think there are going to be some ways that we can get them to that point. I think that their savings in their 529, right now, is aggressive at $1,000 a month. That’s a pretty big chunk of their cash flow. I think that that’s actually going to be enough, depending on some scenarios we may discuss. But really deciding is the order that they gave it to us, to correct order that they have. Is the boy’s education more important than their own retirement? Are they willing to accept the opportunity cost or the change that would require? They may need to work longer to send the boys to college, and really flushing that out.

[00:09:14] TB: I think one of the things that is interesting about this case, because we hear it for a lot of new practitioners, is the age old question of, should I pay down my debt, i.e., my student loans or should I get going on my retirement, my investments? There’s that push and pull that I don’t think really ever goes away, because there’s just different things that are always competing against that berm investment game. So when you look at this, how would you walk them through or walk them down the path of getting down to the granular bits and pieces of the retirement versus the education? Is that something that you would look to model out? Is it really asking more clarifying questions with regard to their goals? Walk me through your thought process there.

[00:10:03] KRH: Sure. I agree with Robert that those are conflicting. So, talking through what’s important when individuals have their own student loan debt, they really do tend to lean towards creating scenarios where that doesn’t exist for their own children. We do a high level nest egg that popping some numbers in, based on this case study, they probably wouldn’t be able to retire in ten years, based on these numbers. So, Robert is correct about that, too. More contribution would be better. As far as the education, we can model out and take a look. Certain schools are going to be more cost effective. There are other things that students can do. Good grades. Robert gives a great talk on collect exams, which I love. My own children have listened to some of the conversation.

There are ways to make college funding more affordable and have those conversations. The kids are at an age at, especially at 16, really to start the conversation about what’s affordable, what makes the most sense, and the parents, setting some boundaries on what they’re comfortable with to not sacrifice their own retirement goals. Yeah, a combination of modeling would definitely answer some of the questions about that expected cost in the future, how much they’re going to be able to cover. What the shortfall is. Then I think Robert’s right too, about finding a better balance with the goals and how to prioritize them.

[00:11:40] TB: Robert, can you give us the cliff notes on the CLEP thing? Because I think that’s actually pretty powerful, if you’re a pharmacist that’s listening and then you have kids that are high school age looking at colleges. This is something that I think [inaudible 00:11:50]. 

[00:11:54] RL: Yeah, Tim. One of the big things that we like to talk about with clients is not necessarily just saving for college, but also ways to save on college and education expenses. There are a ton of ways to do that, whether it’s planning to go to a community college for the first couple of years or it’s maybe just ignoring traditional education and going to our trade schools. But one of the ways I like to do it is just getting credits out of the way, and everyone understands dual enrollment credits and everyone talks about AP courses, where they can test out of college classes, but a CLEP, a C-L-E-P is run by the College Board. It’s the same people that create the SAT. 

What it is? Is it’s a test where you can sit down. Take a one-time test where it costs about 90 bucks on a bunch of general education classes. If they pass that course, then they get to skip it in college, they get automatic credits that will be accepted at the majority of universities. Now, every university in college has their own rubric that they request, and they say, “Hey, you have to get at least 65 on this class for it to count. They only accept these five classes. 65 different CLEPs, that different college will accept. 

If you’re a math major and you don’t want to take English classes, take these two tests while you’re in high school, when you just learn English and never have to take it in college. Or if you’re an English major who doesn’t want to take mathematics, when you take a mathematics and high school that’s practicing for the test, you take a CLEP, you pass it, you never have to take it in college again. It’s a great way to either get a head start on college or get through the classes that are going to slow you down, and allow you due to the coursework that actually excites you and makes you want to go to college, rather than slogging through the first two years of Gen Ed before you can get to the stuff that you care about.

[00:13:20] TB: Yeah, I think it’s now really important to highlight all the tools that are available for students and parents to make a good decision. I feel like, if I get in the time machine and go back to when I was looking at schools, I didn’t have any. And I think because—I would have done very foolish things back in the day. I think that if there are things that we can do, whether scholarships or things like Test NL, going to put the price tag a little bit more affordable. I think probably one of the things that I would want to model out and what’s interesting about the Anderson’s is that they have a goal in place.  

A lot of people, especially, I think if they have young kids, will ask, “What’s the goal for sending your kids to college?” It’s like, “I don’t know.” That’s what we talk about the one third rule, which we’ve talked about at length, where you can pay—basically the idea is that what you’re putting in 529 is one source of the tuition, and then another source would be when your child is 17 or 18 going into college, you’re basically paying that out of your paychecks, you’re sending a check to the college. Then the last third would be the scholarships and the student loans. Last but not least. We use that as a default, that there’s no idea what they want to do. With Fiona and Roy, the idea is put them through four years of undergrad.  

Kelly, we know that not all schools are created equal, right? Whether they go to somewhere like Rutgers, which is in the state in New Jersey or somewhere like The University of Miami, which is a private school out of state in Florida, how do you advise parents to talk to their kids or just approach this with their kids, in terms of sensible decisions with regard—I know it’s hard at 17, 18 year old to go about approaching that question.

[00:15:07] KRH: Well, definitely when we started that conversation, it was talking about what our budget was, what we were going to be able to contribute. Then, looking when we would look up schools, understanding what the tuition is. There’s a number that pops up a lot on schools or websites. That’s an average cost, unfortunately, depending on your income and for many of our clients. That income is not going to reflect what that average cost is. So the average cost assumes 100 percent paid for, in some scenarios, all the way up to paying the full price tag. It’s really good to understand what your cost is likely to be, and at this income level for Fiona and Roy, it’s probably not a whole lot of financial aid.  

I would assume no financial aid based on need. I do recommend having an understanding of what your cost might be. What schools are going to give those scholarships? There are certain schools that only give financial based need aid. There are schools that give grants for being a tuba player, the football player, great academics. So knowing your skills, what your talents are in a range. I would agree, we mentioned, Rutgers, a state school is going to be different than Princeton. What does that look like between the two? But I think people also discount private schools, and just seeing some of those schools have pretty nice endowment and a little better package. I would say I’d look at a nice handful.

We sometimes see kids are applying to 30 schools. You’re busting your budget, just on application fees. So, pick a few that makes sense. Have a few you can compare apples to apples, oranges to oranges and be like—you’re really looking for the best package and the best fit that’s financially viable for you and the student borrower, who’s going to take on any debt that you all can’t pay for if the savings is at capacity. 

[00:17:14] TB: Yeah, I agree. I think one of the wildcards in this whole situation is we look at the taxable account. So, I don’t think I broke down what they have in their 401K. But Fiona has a 425 plus another 15 in an old 401K, Roy has 459. Then they have 365 and a Roth IRA and 195 – Ira. I think the wild card Robert, in this whole scenario in terms of the planning is what to do with the RSUs. These are a weird, because it’s compensation that comes in the form of stock that can grow over time. I’m a big proponent of like, “Okay, let’s tie this to something.” So, is this something that is for retirement? Is this something that they could apply towards the debt, towards the education? What’s your thought with regard to—how would you approach it? How to utilize that for the goals that the Andersons have?

[00:18:08] RL:  Yeah. So restricted stock units, for those who aren’t aware, are a form of compensation when a company gives you stock, but you have to invest into it, right? Generally it comes in with the grant where it says, “Hey, you’re going to get this many shares.” Then, you’ll get a portion of it every year or quarter or month depending on the policy. It’s really like golden handcuffs. It’s a way for a company to make sure that you’re not going to want to leave. “Hey, here’s this money, but you have to stay here to get it.” Yeah, you may want to leave, but you have some invested RSU grants that you’re not going to be able to get if you leave right now. So you should probably just stay with us. 

One of the things that I like to make sure clients understand is that these RSUs are just income, right? It’s taxed as income when you get it and you need to treat it as such. Although it looks like this big shiny object that we have to save and grow forever, it is just income and we can use it as such. So when we look at them, their big goals are, “Hey, I want to pay for college. Hey, I want to make sure we retire. Hey, I want to have less debt.” We want to help them, again, rack and stack those goals where sure, if we need that money for college, then it’s there, right? But if we can find out a plan for college, “Okay, cool. Let’s check that off, the boys understand what we have for them. The boys are going to come up with their own plan and it’s going to be financially settled.” 

Okay, retirement. How can we use this money toward retirement? We could reorganize our cash flow, when we’re actually cashing out. Some of these are issues which would allow us to put more away in our retirement buckets. That’s a great way to use it. Another way is to solve that fourth goal. These are issues again. It’s just a taxable investment account. We have an unknown what the capital gains are, so we’re not sure, in this scenario, exactly how much of that is the grant itself and how much that is gained. 

There will be some tax complications of this plan, but the $125,000 could, in reality, pay off all of their debt other than the mortgage. We can pay off the HELOC, which is $43,000 at 5 percent. We could pay off the cars at 3.5 and 4.5 percent. We could pay off the student loans at 4.5 percent. Then all they would have left is the mortgage that would free up $2,300 in cash flow on a monthly basis—

[00:20:04] TB: It is huge.

[00:20:05] RL: That’s huge, that’s a huge amount of money, okay. That could then turn around and immediately go towards extra savings, extra travel budget for that graduation trip they want to take in two years, extra 401K contributions. Right now, they’re doing 4 percent plus a 4 percent match. We could easily get that to ten or 12 percent without changing their life at all, only by reallocating those RSU dollars that are just sitting in a holding to this thing. We also know that she’s getting more RSUs, so this isn’t the end of her getting company stock. She’s going to get those refreshed, which is what happens when you get a new grant all the time. So as long as she’s still working, those grants are going to keep coming. We just want to make sure we’re using them appropriately.

They’re just sitting there, maybe they’re growing, they’re doing phenomenally, maybe they’re going down. We got to check the company trajectory, but using that to solve an immediate goal, like get out of debt and save for retirement would be a huge lift on somebody’s spirit. Having done that with clients in the past, taking those dollars that you feel are being wasted and putting them to something that you actually feel pain over, is huge.

[00:21:05] TB: Yeah. I think one of the things that I would want to unpack. I love all of the different avenues to go, potential pot of money, the RSUs, which is, like you said, another form of compensation. I think the other thing that I would really want to impact with the two of them is to retire in the next ten, 15 years. Is it closer to ten? Is it closer to 15? One of the things that’s going through my RICP coursework that I just thought was astounding was delaying retirement by three to six months is the equivalent of saving 1 percent more for the course of your 30 year career. 

Another way to look at is delaying retirement by one month is the equivalent of saving 1 percent more for the final ten years before retirement. One of the big things that I think people get wrong in retirement is when to claim Social Security. Obviously, if you can delay that, you have an income stream for life that follows inflation that’s super valuable. So, are there ways to potentially increase that retirement paycheck? Now, they could look us and we know that this is true, guys. In pharmacies, I only got ten more years left. I’m burning out, I’m not good. Maybe there is the ability to work part time or things like that. 

I think to Robert, to your point, being able to model out and move those pieces around to say, “We could use this pot of money and clear all that debt that frees up that cash” is a beautiful thing. But they could also say, “We feel bullish on the company that we want to let it ride and we won’t have the certainty there of cashing out and retiring those debts. Maybe we’ll let it ride for greater upside, but we know that there’s risk there as well.” Super fascinating. The nice thing about this is there are pieces to move here and there’s different scenarios to run. I guess, one question I would have with regard to the protection of the plan. Kelly, what are some things where their insurance related or a state plan and related that you see has some areas of exposure for them?

[00:22:59] KRH: I mean, in general, the insurance looks pretty good. The term 20 years, they just purchased it five years ago. So they’re going to get the kids through college. I know we had talked about this the last time. What amounts make sense of the disability policies? The amount looks reasonable with the 60 percent of income replaced. I would say the own-occupation for two years is a little bit of a question mark or sometimes we see the policies follow an income amount. So is it the income amount? Or is it that owning your own or any occupation? That’s probably something, I’d look at a little further, because we know just with the actuarial data that that can be a bigger problem than [inaudible 00:23:42]. But things look reasonable. 

I would say, I would get the estate planning documents updated. So I would get the will double checked and updated, some other things probably have changed, as well over the last six years. I am a fan of having advanced medical directives in place, in terms of retirement. I think one of the statistics in our slide deck is that things happen sooner than we think they might happen at times. On the positive side, if you have an opportunity to retire, great. But sometimes health events, issues, things happen unexpectedly. So having your documents in place is important, and it makes it a lot simpler and less chaotic, especially at this phase. The kids aren’t really old enough to be making decisions, so you do still need to have things in place for sure.

[00:24:38] TB: Yeah. I think obviously that’s one of the often overlooked parts of the financial plan. Unless you’re military, where they force you to do wills and things like that, that’s where you typically see it more frequently. But just making sure that that’s buttoned up and there’s a plan in place for that. I think the other thing that I would probably circle back on. Robert, I would love to hear your thoughts on, is just the overall allocation. Do you think l balance funds—I see that we’re funding the traditional IRA, which see— were in 2035 target date funds, which are in that time frame. Ten to 15 years is still a pretty long time to go, so I’d want to dig deeper into that in terms of what they’re actually invested in.  

We know, as we talked over at length in the past, that the allocation console of a lot of things, because if you’re looking at ten years, 20 years-time, typically the stock market, will take care of you. So, how would you look at their investments, particularly with the traditional IRA and maybe some of the allocations that you’re seeing?

[00:25:35] KRH: Yeah. One of the things on the traditional IRA that we need to double check on is, how are these dollars even going in there? Based on the fact that she has a 401K and they make so much money, shouldn’t be qualified for deductible contributions. So we want to make sure that these contributions have been going in undeductable, that they’re not trying to take a deduction on it. Beyond that, having them in a balanced fund doesn’t sound bad. 

Most people in the world will believe that balanced means 50/50, but in the finance world it means 60/40, because why would we make sense? So a 60/40 fund on that account isn’t terrible for their age range, but it’s probably a little conservative. To go along with that, the target date 2035 funds, which are just mutual funds aged for a use at 2035, so they decrease in risk over time. Those are probably about the same right now, so about 60/40 at this point in time. I think that that should be probably extended. If they’re going to stay at a target date fund which is not necessarily a bad thing, I’d probably want to extend it closer to that 2045 timeframe to line up more with a normalized retirement. 

You don’t actually aim for the year you’re planning to retire. It’s more so you aim for 65 and then that stretches out over your lifetime. It’ll never go to 0 percent investments. It’ll always have something in the market, because if we’re going to live to 100, we can’t just put it all into cash the day we retire. We need to have some risk in there. I think they still need to have a little bit more risk going on. So we want to look at what options they have, what the fees are, what the expenses are, how complex we can make it, but at the very minimum, I’d to maybe take that up to about 80/20 from a risk perspective. We obviously talk to them and make sure that they’re comfortable with that amount, but with their current time horizon, I think that that would still work.

[00:27:10] TB: Yeah, I think it’s asking a clarifying question and maybe digging into – because I think, even all target date funds in this, they aren’t created the same. There’s different allocations that are associated, depending on the year. I think the other thing that I would probably want to look at, just to make sure, is that you could have a balanced fund for the 529, which might be good for Michael’s accounts, but maybe not for Paul’s. Maybe it is Paul’s 14, so he has a couple more years, maybe just looking at that.

As Michael is going to college, we’re not overexposed in equities and we see a crash and then not as much dollars are there. One question, and then we wrap this up, guys. I think one question that I would ask related to the mortgage. They’re 46 and 48, respectively. Based on their refi that happened after what was that? That was in 2015, so we’ll say seven years ago, they had 23 years left on the mortgage.

Kelly, you recently relocated, so maybe get your take on this. Your thoughts on you—whenever says like, we have too much debt. I think Robert did an excellent job of outlining the path, or basically, we can redeploy some of the assets to basically wipe all the debt out, except for the mortgage. My question is this. If I’m mid to late 40s, or 50s, and I have a mortgage that’s going to take me well beyond retirement age, should I be freaking out about that, or what’s your thought? How do you talk clients off the bar to that part?

Because of debt, obviously, this is something that can be a detriment to your retirement paycheck in the future. Walk me through what you guys think in terms of that. It’s like, now I’m 46, I’m 48, we have 23 years left in the mortgage, or that [inaudible 00:28:54].

[00:28:56] KRH: Oh, my gosh. I love this question, because I think it really could be all over the place. I think, well, I feel like, there could be a point-counterpoint, point-counterpoint about this. It is interesting. Off the top of my head, when we do the nest egg, we’re like, okay, the wage replacement ratio, 70 percent of what you’re living on now, because you’re debt-free, you’re not paying into retirement. They’ve said that they want to move. It will be interesting to see if you are downsizing and you’re going to sell the house. Anyhow, that current mortgage debt is not going to be as big of an issue.

I would say, if they’re not moving, ideally, you’d probably like to see it paid off, but it really does come down to cash flow. When we run modeling and looking at retirement and potential for success to reach a very pleasant age of 95, or a 100 and still have resources, it really always comes down to cash flow and budget. What you’re living on per year has a big impact on that. Is the mortgage affordable to make the plan work? It really does depend. It would go in the modeling and scenarios and again, comfort.

I guess, I would lean towards wanting the debt paid off if I wasn’t moving before retirement. Then, we just have that conversation in my house and my spouse is like, “I could live with pain for a couple years, and then we sell it, and we become expats on a Caribbean island.”

It depends, but I do think it does a little bit. Wherever they go with it, Robert, I will love to hear what you add in, too. Before I turn it over to Robert, I would say, too, the other thing about wealth protection, at this stage, this is often when our parents are having stuff going on, too, if their parents are still alive and they have a relationship with some understanding about that. That relationship, hope and expectation is definitely a key part of protection. I’m often surprised at what an overwhelming time that can be. The kids are in college, but the parents have some type of health issue, and that can be stressful as well.

[00:31:20] TB: Which is important to bring up, because it’s not necessarily that Fiona or Roy’s parents would be our clients, but their parents situation can affect the financial plan of our clients. It’s good to get in front of that before—have those hard conversations about who is doing what or providing care, or if they have policies that not left the—cover down on that. Yeah, that’s a huge important point. How about you, Robert, in terms of the debt? 23 years left. I’m in my mid to late 40s. Should I be freaking out about that, or is it depends?

[00:31:51] RL: Specifically for the mortgage, I think, to Kelly’s point there, that two of them in our own household have different vibes on that. That’s one of the key things when we’re talking about this with clients is, mathematically, I can tell you the right answer. Mathematically, it’s interest rate arbitrage. We’re paying 4 percent of the mortgage. We can get 8.50 percent, 80-20 portfolio. We should just put it in the retirement accounts. The emotional variable, I can’t calculate for. 

If someone has a money script that tells them that they have to have no mortgage when they retire, because they saw their parents or their grandparents have issues in their life because they had a mortgage tying them down, then that’s something we have to attack. If they’re going to downsize, doesn’t necessarily mean that their mortgage is going to go down. In Florida, are they going to leave a single-family home in New Jersey and move to a very swanky condo, 50s plus condo in Florida where they’re playing shuffleboard with movie stars? Maybe they’re going to be paying more even with less space. Those are some things to work out.

Having that conversation of 4 percent interest rate, although it may have sounded extremely large a year and a half ago, or even six months ago, is really a good rate historically. It’s not going to be the end of the world. It’s a securitized debt, so it’s tied to their house. I would be more worried about the other loans.

[00:33:05] TB: I was going to say the same thing. Probably, even the student loans that have probably just been kicked down the road a bit, I would almost—and this is probably an emotional thing, because I’m sure the—well, we said that the student loans are four and a quarter. Then not much more. I think, and this is more an emotional thing, this is a bias of mine, I’m like, “Let’s retire those loans before we start sending Michael to school,” would be my thought.

It’s a great point is, what is the plan in the future? It’s that arbitrage. Do we emotionally make that extra payment on a 4 percent mortgage, which historically over a 30-year mortgage reduces that by seven years, if you pay that extra payment, or do you put that extra payment more towards the retirement, get a better rate of return over the long-term and secure that?

I don’t know. That’s also another thing that, as Kelly mentioned, in her household, it’s different. It’s different in our household, too. I don’t think it really even registers with, where I’m I in my mind want to have the mortgage paid off as I retire, which in my mind is 70, but I could lose my marbles before that and have to retire sooner. That could be a thing. That’s another thing that people sometimes discount, is that you’re not always in control of when you actually retire, either because of career stuff, or health stuff.

Yeah. I think these are fascinating questions that we’re talking about this on a vacuum, but really go back and ask Fiona, ask Roy, the fake clients that we’re talking about, some clarifying questions about the debt, about the investments, the education and with the retirement picture, I think would be really important to then proceed with the plan.

Again, as we always say, it’s not about necessarily the plan. It’s about planning, because we know the next time we talk, there’s going to be a wrench in the system that’s going to potentially have a zig and zag as we get further along the plan. Guys, anything else to add?

[00:34:52] KRH: No.

[00:34:51] RL: No. I think they’re in a great spot. I think that Fiona and Roy have done a really good job of setting themselves up for success. People always like to say, and I use this phrase all the time, “Money is power.” But money is not power. Options are power. Having the option to do different things, and having the ability to make different plans is powerful. They have put themselves in a place where they have a lot of options going forward, and they can choose what they believe is the best path. The best plan is one that works. As long as it works for them, then they made the right choice.

[00:35:19] TB: Totally agree.

[00:35:20] KRH: If they use the RSUs to buy an RV, we’ll see.

[00:35:24] TB: Don’t do it. Don’t do it. I was talking to the team last night, on our happy hour, that I said $800 RV. It’s actually $1,100. Yeah, they’re a money pit All right. Robert, Kelly, thanks again for talking about the Andersons on our case study here. Looking forward to doing the next one here, in the next couple of months. Yeah, we’ll do it again soon.

[00:35:45] RL: Toodles.

[MESSAGE]

[00:35:47] ANNOUNCER: Before we wrap up today’s show, let’s hear an important message from our sponsor, Insuring Income. If you are in the market to add own-occupation disability insurance, term-life insurance or both, Insuring Income would love to be a resource. Insuring Income has relationships with all of the high-quality disability insurance and life insurance carriers you should be considering, and can help you design coverage to best protect you and your family.

Head over to insuringincome.com/yourfinancialpharmacist, or click on their link in the show notes to request quotes, ask a question, or start down your own path of learning more about this necessary protection.

[DISCLAIMER]

[00:36:23] ANNOUNCER: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment, or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation, or offer to buy or sell any investment, or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment.

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of your financial pharmacists, unless otherwise noted, and constitute judgments as of the date publish. Such information may contain forward-looking statements that are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements.

For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. Thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 256: Why YFP Planning’s Lead Financial Planners Are All CFPs®


Why YFP Planning’s Lead Financial Planners Are All CFPs®

On today’s episode, sponsored by Splash Financial, YFP Planning Financial Planner, Kimberly Bolton, CFP® discusses why the CFP® designation is the most valuable credential when providing comprehensive financial planning, why the term financial planner in and of itself doesn’t mean a whole lot, what questions you can ask to find a planner who is a good fit for you, and what someone can expect when working with a financial planner.

About Today’s Guest

Kimberly Bolton, CFP®, is a Financial Planner at YFP Planning. Along with her team members, Robert Lopez, CFP®, and Savannah Nichols, she strives to help YFP Planning clients on their financial journey to living their best lives. To go along with her CFP® designation, Kim has a B.S. in Consumer Sciences with a concentration in Family Financial Planning and Counseling. When not working, Kim enjoys being in the sunshine, hitting the gym, hiking, traveling, taking her dogs Nugget and Toot on adventures, being a food enthusiast with her husband Allen, and spending time with her bonus kids Brianna and Brady.

Episode Summary

This week, YFP Co-Founder & CEO, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, sits down with YFP Planning Financial Planner, Kimberly Bolton, CFP®, to discuss why all of the lead financial planners at YFP Planning are CFPs®. In their discussion, Tim and Kim cover why Your Financial Pharmacist believes the CFP®, CERTIFIED FINANCIAL PLANNER, designation is the most valuable credential when providing comprehensive financial planning. Kim shares her personal story of becoming a CFP®, the rigorous education and experience requirements to become a CFP®, the comprehensive nature of the CFP® exam, the ethical standards associated with the credential, and why the CFP® is considered the most prestigious financial designation in the industry. She digs into why the term financial planner, or financial advisor, in and of itself doesn’t mean a whole lot, what specific questions you can ask to find a planner that is a good fit for you, and what someone can expect when working with a financial planner. Kim also explains common fee structures in the financial planning industry and why YFP Planning uses a fee-only structure. Tim shares a little bit of his own experience as a YFP Planning client himself, echoing Kim’s sentiment that the partnership between planner and client is an intimate one and that as a client, feeling comfortable with your planner will make an incredible difference in your experience. Kim closes with an awesome client success story, sharing how one couple was able to make their home-owning dreams come true years earlier than planned. 

Key Points From This Episode

  • Background on Kim’s professional journey to becoming a CFP®.
  • What inspired her to pursue a career in financial planning.
  • We find out about the work that Kim is currently involved with at YFP Planning.
  • Why the YFP team believe so much in the CFP® designation.
  • Some examples of how comprehensive the CFP® training is.
  • How working with a certified CFP® is beneficial for the client.
  • Kim tells us what is required to enter the CFP® course.
  • What people taking the CFP® board exam can expect.
  • Learn about the experience requirement needed after passing the exam.
  • The expected ethical standards once you are certified.
  • Differences in the types of CFP® planners in terms of fees and services.
  • A brief breakdown of the different fee structures associated with CFP® planners.
  • Examples of good questions to ask a financial planner to ensure they are the right fit for you.
  • Kim shares a success story about working with a CFP®.

Highlights

“If you do any research on it, you’ll see that [being a Certified Financial Planner] is titled the most prestigious financial designation that you can have within the industry.” — Kimberly Bolton, CFP® [0:10:02]

“Here at YFP, it’s really important to us that our clients are comfortable with our recommendations. We want the clients to feel that the recommendations we make are made because it is in the client’s best interest.” — Kimberly Bolton, CFP® [0:11:58]

“Talking about your finances is a very intimate conversation. You want to make sure you are comfortable with your financial planner, because you’re going to have some intimate talks about your finances!” — Kimberly Bolton, CFP® [0:22:33]

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRODUCTION]

 [00:00:00] TU: Hey, everybody. Tim Ulbrich here, and thank you for listening to the YFP Podcast where, each week, we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. 

This week, I had a chance to welcome YFP Planning financial planner, Kim Bolton, onto the show. We discuss why we believe the CFP, Certified Financial Planner, designation is the most valuable credential when providing comprehensive financial planning. We also discuss why the term financial planner or financial advisor in and of itself doesn’t mean a whole lot, what questions you can ask to find a planner that is a good fit for you, and what someone can expect when working with a financial planner. 

Now, before we hear from today’s sponsor and then jump into the show, I recognize that many listeners may not be aware of what the team at YFP Planning does in working one-on-one with more than 240 households in 45 states. YFP Planning offers fee-only high-touch financial planning that is customized for the pharmacy professional. If you’re interested in learning more about how working one-on-one with a certified financial planner may help you achieve your financial goals, you can book a free discovery call at yfpplanning.com. Whether or not YFP Planning’s financial planning services are a good fit for you, know that we appreciate your support of this podcast and our mission to help pharmacists achieve financial freedom. 

Okay, let’s hear from today’s sponsor, and then we’ll jump into my conversation with YFP Planning financial planner, Kim Bolton. This episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast is sponsored by Splash Financial. With interest rates on the rise, it’s a good time to evaluate the refinancing of your student loans. If you’ve ever considered refinancing your loans, check your rate now through Splash Financial. If you qualify, refinancing could help you get a lower monthly payment on your student loans or get a lower interest rate. Splash helps you shop and compare loan refinancing offers across lenders nationwide. 

Browsing rates through Splash Financial is fast, free, and won’t impact your credit until you complete a full application. Now, when you successfully refinance $50,000 or more, Splash Financial will give you an extra $500 in cash bonus using our link, splashfinancial.com/yfp. So check your rate today and see what you might be able to save at splashfinancial.com/yfp. 

[INTERVIEW]

[00:02:21] TU: Kim, welcome to the show.

[00:02:22] KB: Thanks. Thanks for having me. I’m really excited to be here. 

[00:02:25] TU: Well, this has been a long time in the making. We just celebrated your two-year anniversary here with YFP. So Kim is one of our financial planners that works with the team at YFP Planning. Today, we’re going to be talking all about why our financial planners are all CFP, certified financial planners, and why we believe so much in the CFP designation. The reason we’re putting Kim on the hot seat to talk about this topic is Kim just completed all of the components of the CFP to be able to use those marks. So, Kim, congratulations officially. Exciting to see that to the finish line.

[00:02:57] KB: Yeah, thanks. Thanks so much. It was a long journey. It took me – If you counted like my school and everything, it was about a six-year journey that it took to have the three little letters put behind my name. 

[00:03:11] TU: We’ll talk about why that takes so long and why those three letters are so important. But before we jump into learning about the CFP requirements, a certified financial planner requirement, tell us more about your career journey leading up to and including the work that you’re doing with YFP Planning.

[00:03:26] KB: Yeah. So my career journey in the financial planning industry actually began with YFP. YFP is the first financial firm that I have ever worked for. Before Tim found me, I had applied and interviewed with a couple of big corporate financial firms, and I had just realized like that’s not really where I want to be. Like that didn’t feel like home to me. Prior to the financial planning industry, I actually worked for the University of Alabama. I was an office administrator in their maintenance department. So I kind of already had experience with like the customer service piece and like invoicing and paperwork and the admin part of the job. 

[00:04:03] TU: Where did that interest come from, Kim, in terms of that pursuit of a career in financial planning?

[00:04:08] KB: So I was actually four months from graduating from college with an English major when I realized I want to be a financial planner, not an English major. So it started way back probably when I was like 16 and first started working. So I learned at a pretty young age how to semi-manage my finances since I had a car payment and insurance and things like that. Then I went through college thinking I was going to be an English major, and I realized in my thesis analysis class that that’s not where I wanted to be. 

So I went and talked with my college advisor. Just through like brainstorming different jobs that I could have, I had kind of come up with the idea of a finance major. A finance major and a financial planning major are – It’s similar, but they’re very different. The finance major is more broad than the financial planning major. So you get pretty like concentrated when you do just a financial planning major. So when I had first mentioned finance to my advisor, we were going through the different jobs that I could have with that degree and everything, and we eventually just realized that I wanted to help people with their finances, and I wanted to help people be able to retire and live a financial-free life. 

 Then that’s when we decided that financial planning is what I wanted to do. So four months before graduating, I changed my degree to be financial planning. It added a year and a half onto my schooling, but it was completely worth it, and now here I am, being a financial planner.

[00:05:39] TU: I think for those, Kim, that have not worked with a planner, it can be hard to understand, like what do I expect? What is actually involved in that relationship? What does it look like? One of the things we’re going to talk about is how different this service can be. Certainly, that term financial planner, that term financial advisor, wealth manager, lots of terms that are used, it does not mean that all things are created equal. So there’s a variety of ways that it can be done. 

But I think for folks that have not worked with a planner, it can even just be hard to wrap your arms around what does this actually look like. So as it relates to your work with YFP Planning and working alongside lead planner, Robert Lopez, give us a sneak peek into what your day-to-day, what your week-to-week looks like, as you help support the financial planning process for over 100 pharmacist households. 

[00:06:23] KB: Right. So day-to-day, we’re pretty much in the nitty-gritty financial planning. So day-to-day, I’m helping Robert get prepared for meetings, making the presentations for him. So if you are a client of YFP and you’ve ever seen any kind of slideshow or slide deck, that is definitely me and Savannah, working behind the scenes to kind of put that together for him. Working with Robert to help make any kind of recommendations, usually like the two of us brainstorm together to make the best recommendation for the client based on their certain situation.

Then from a week-to-week perspective, that’s kind of when you get a bigger picture, and you have like more projects coming in. So right at this moment, it looks like transitioning our clients into like a quarterly meeting schedule and kind of what that looks like for them, what that involves from us from like a workflow perspective, and really kind of catapulting that into existence and moving clients into a quarterly schedule. 

Overall, I directly support Robert and just make sure he’s prepared to give the client the recommendation, and I help him do any kind of research that is needed so that we can make sure we’re making the right call on different financial scenarios.

[00:07:37] TU: Robert, for folks that have not heard him on the podcast before, Robert Lopez is one of our lead financial planners, along with Kelly Reddy-Heffner. We had Robert on the podcast most recently on episode 248, where he talked about some public service loan forgiveness, PSLF, success story. So if folks are wondering, “Who is Robert,” that is who Robert is.  

I think you highlighted well, Kim, that there’s a lot of work that goes on behind the scenes. I think about as we bring on a new client into YFP Planning, there’s a lot of work involved in terms of the onboarding, making sure we have all the information and then, of course, in the ongoing basis, preparing for meetings, following up for meetings. There could be transactions that need to happen, tasks that we need to make sure that we follow up on. 

Even as one example, myself that you help, so I’m a client of YFP Planning, and Tim Baker is my financial planner. As I made the transition from Ohio State to working full time at YFP about a year ago, I had to do a rollover of my 401(a). So I had some questions as I looked at those forums. I wanted to make sure I did it right. I wanted to make sure there was no implications in terms of taxes or penalties. So you helped me execute that transition and that rollover. Lots of things that are happening that people may not see at face value, even for those that are engaged with the planning, where they jump onto an hour meeting or so with the lead planner. 

Kim, one of the things we’ve touched on in the past is the importance of understanding, as I mentioned just a few moments ago, that not all financial planners are created equal. So they can have varied educational experiences. They can carry different designations. They can be regulated in different ways. They can charge in a variety of ways. We’re going to link to in the show notes an important resource that we have available to download for free, and that is the nuts and bolts of hiring a financial planner that I would encourage listeners to check out. 

In that resource, we cover what are the different types of planners, how do they get paid, what are some questions that folks may consider asking when they hire a planner. Again, that’s the nuts and bolts to hiring planner. You can get that and download that at yourfinancialpharmacist.com/nutsandbolts, and we’ll link to that in the show notes as well. 

So we’re going to focus our time on the CFP designation, the certified financial planners. We believe that that is the credential that’s an important criteria to do comprehensive financial planning and to do it well. We’re proud to have five CFPs on the YFP Planning team that collectively serve over 250 pharmacist households for one-on-one planning. Kim, let me punt this to you since you’re the most recent designee of the CFP on the YFP Planning team. Why does YFP believe so much in the CFP designation?

[00:10:10] KB: So the CFP designation, if you do any kind of research on it, you’ll see that it’s kind of titled the most prestigious financial designation that you can have within the industry. I really think that YFP believes in the CFP designation the way that we do, simply because when you have the CFP designation or you’re working towards that designation, you’re really proving to yourself and you’re proving to others how high of standards you have for yourself. So when someone is either in the process or has a designation, they are being extensively tested and quizzed on their knowledge of financial planning. 

The questions and the coursework that you go through, it really digs deep and it makes you apply those financial planning concepts to real-life scenarios. So even though like you may be answering a multiple choice question when you’re being tested or when you’re doing like practice quizzes and everything, if you don’t understand how to apply the concept to a real-life scenario, then chances are you’re not going to be able to answer that question correctly. So the CFP designation really just sets you aside from everybody and shows how serious you are about your career in the financial planning world. 

Another part to that is CFP designation requires that you be a fiduciary, which in short means you put the client’s interest above your own, even if that recommendation doesn’t necessarily benefit you. It just benefits the client. This would come into play, for example, like if a financial planner had recommended that somebody go out and get like a $1 million life insurance policy. There are scenarios where if you’re not a fiduciary, you could be recommending that to that client because it’s in your best interest, because you possibly get a commission off of that. 

Here at YFP, it’s really important to us that our clients are comfortable with our recommendations. We want the clients to feel that the recommendations we make are made because it is in the client’s best interest. We don’t want that client to think like, “Hey, are they just making this recommendation because it benefits them, not because it benefits me?” So that’s really the big picture why I think YFP takes the CFP designation and so serious, is because it gives our clients that peace of mind. It gives them that level of comfort with us that we are working in their best interest, and we are doing what’s going to benefit them more than what’s going to benefit us.

[00:12:35] TU: Yeah. That was a great explanation, Kim, the fiduciary piece. We’re actually going to link that in the show notes. If people want to learn more about what the fiduciary standard is, why it matters, how it’s different from what’s known as the suitability standard, John Oliver has a great segment on this topic, and we’ll link to that in the show notes. Kim, you explained it well. So I think the highlights there would be the fiduciary piece, the rigors we’ll talk about in a moment, what makes up the CFP designation. 

As Tim Baker often says, “The bar of entry into financial advising and hanging a shingle to be a financial adviser is fairly low.” So being able to have some rigor, some documented evidence of the work that’s been put in, the seriousness of that training, and obviously being prepared to then provide comprehensive financial planning, that’s something we see often that traditional financial planning services might not necessarily be serving at folks in all different phases of life. Are they well-versed in things from retirement planning to debt management and everything in between? I think if you look at the CFP curriculum, very intense but also very comprehensive. 

So to that point, in terms of the rigor and the intensity, Kim you mentioned several years it took you to obtain that designation. So talk to us about the requirements that one must go through in order to be able to use those three letters by their name. 

[00:13:52] KB: Right. So there’s a couple of different ways that you can be qualified for the CFP exam. The most common is for someone to go through the CFP board’s coursework. In my situation, my college degree qualified me for the CFP exam. So you either have to have a bachelor’s degree that qualifies you for the exam, or you have to go through the CFP board’s coursework. Then once you have completed the education piece, you were then allowed to sit for the exam. The exam is 170 questions. They give you a six-hour limit, and it’s broken into three-hour segments. So three hours and then they let you leave for 30 minutes, and then you come back for the remaining three hours. Yeah, it’s pretty brutal. 

When I was taking mine, the lady that was working the front desk at the testing center when I left or when I was leaving, she told me, she said, “You’ve been here a long time today.” I’m like, “Yes, I just took a really long test.” Then once you pass that exam, which again during that exam, you’re tested on the ability to apply financial planning to real-life scenarios, and then you’re given a few different case studies where you have to dig through. It’s like a multiple answer question that you have to really look at. 

Then once you have passed the exam, you are then required to fulfill an experience requirement. So if you are working directly underneath another CFP, which in my case, I was working directly under Robert and Tim Baker, so working underneath them, I was required to get 4,000 hours of experience, which comes in at almost two years of work in the financial planning industry. Once all that is complete, then you basically sign your life away, saying you will be a fiduciary from here on out, and you will uphold to the CFP board’s like ethical standards and their standards of conduct.  

Then every year, we have some CE courses that we have to do. It sounds simple, but it’s really complex. After you’ve done all that, so the education, the exam, the experience, and then once you agree to the ethical requirements, you become a CFP.

[00:16:02] TU: Yeah. So I think pharmacists, they can relate to this, right? You described an educational component, you described an examination, and then you described what I would consider like an experiential component. So you mentioned 4,000 hours of practical experience and not until all of those have been completed and plus the acknowledgement that you’re going to uphold the fiduciary standard. Then at that point, you can use the certified financial planner marks. 

We think about pharmacy education. You’ve got the doctor pharmacy program. You’ve got the experiential rotations, which are typically throughout school, and then the final year of pharmacy school. Then we have the licensure examination. So we have a NAPLEX exam, and then we have a state law examination. However, what I’ll point out here is that I won’t say the NAPLEX is easy, but the pass rate of the CFP is much lower than the NAPLEX. I’m looking at the March 2022 examination of the CFP, and the pass rate was only 65 percent, so a very rigorous exam. 

Typically, we see board pass rates in pharmacy – I think the last I looked at it, we’re closer to 85 to 90 percent, so very rigorous exam. Then to my comment earlier, it’s a great benchmark, certainly not the only thing folks should be looking at as they’re shopping for a planner, but a good indicator that someone has gone through a rigorous process, educational component, examination, and an experiential piece that demonstrates their ability to do planning. 

Kim, I mentioned this briefly earlier, but I want to talk more about it in this concept of are all CFPs created equal in terms of types of services and how fees are assessed. Really, when you get the CFP marks, you have demonstrated that you’ve gone through all the things that you just talked to, but that may not mean that all CFPs are operating in the same way in terms of the services that they offer or as well as in the fees that they’re charging, correct?

[00:17:44] KB: Yeah, that’s right. So it’s really a wide range of like different services and different fee structures that you can have. Kind of to be brief with it and not go down a rabbit hole, you can have CFPs that are comprehensive planners. So that’s like us here at YFP, where we go from one end of the spectrum to the other. We can help you buy a house, we can help you invest your 401(k), or we can help you improve your credit score, anything along the lines. So it’s really everything under that financial planning umbrella. 

Or you can have CFPs that strictly do just investment management. This is going to be CFPs that worked directly with your investments, so like that employer retirement plan or that traditional IRA or Roth IRA that you may have. Just another different spectrum that you could be on is you could simply work at an insurance company, and you could be the financial planner that is selling the insurance, whether it’d be life insurance, disability, umbrella insurance. It’s a big world out there, and so your options are kind of limitless on what kind of services you provide. 

Then as far as fees go, so really the three most common that most people have probably heard is a fee-based, commission-based, or a fee-only. So fee-only is what we are here at YFP. I’m sure we’ve mentioned it a few times on the podcast but fee-only basically. When you come on board with us, and we quote you your price to work with us, that is the price. That is what we are paid. We don’t get any kind of commissions or any kind of kickbacks or anything like that. Whereas with commission-based fees, that planner is going to work strictly off of the commissions that they make from selling you products. 

Then fee-based gets a little sticky because it is where it can be a flat fee, but then you also receive kickbacks off of people’s investments or insurance policies or things like that. So fees and services can get a little bit sticky and can be a tad complicated, but that is in short are like the major ones that are the most common.

[00:19:44] TU: Yeah. As you described, Kim, it really is the Wild Wild West in terms of how services are constructed, how often you meet with a planner, what to expect, what they’re managing, what they’re doing, as well as the fees, and how those fees are assessed and charged. So that really means there’s due diligence on the client side to be asking the right questions as they’re conducting that search. We talked about this in detail in episode 54. Several other resources we have as well available at yfpplanning.com. Folks can look for more information there. But it really talks more about the model that we do at YFP Planning, as well as the concept of fee-only.

I want to just for a moment give an example, Kim, of fee-only and why we believe that matters. So you gave the definition of it. Let’s say you’re working with a client, Kim, and you determine that there’s a need for, let’s just say, long-term disability insurance on top of some employer coverage they may have. Well, under the fiduciary standard, under the fee-only model, as you work with that client to determine what the benefit need is, you’re not selling the insurance policy, number one, and you’re not getting any direct kickback for the recommendation of any specific product that you would be recommending. 

In that case, you can really help evaluate objectively what does the client need, what does the client not need, and then help look at a variety of different options as they shop those policies around. So I think that many pharmacists that will resonate with them in terms of wanting to have unbiased recommendations as possible. To that point that I made that it’s important, we’re asking good questions to understand what do people do in terms of services and how do they charge. What are some questions that you would recommend, Kim, folks ask as they’re looking for a planner that is hopefully a good fit for them?

[00:21:25] KB: Yeah. So I think the first question you should ask is are you a fiduciary? Because simply, you want somebody that is going to give you advice based on your best interest, not the planner’s best interest. The second big one is like what qualifications do you have. You want to make sure that your planner is qualified to actually be giving you financial advice, and it’s not just somebody like posing as a financial planner. Then how are you paid is going to be another big one. So that’s going to tell you like, “Do they receive commission off of me like. Is this a fee-only relationship?” So how are you paid is a big one. 

Then another one would be like how is our relationship going to work. So you want to make sure that you and the financial planner are on the same page about how the relationship will work between the two of you. So like how often will you meet? Like how will you manage my assets? How do you plan to help me buy a house? Like kind of what does the relationship look like? Other than those big questions, I would simply just make sure that you jive with that financial planner. 

Talking about your finances is a very intimate conversation, so you want to make sure like you are comfortable with that financial planner because you’re going to have some intimate talks about your finances. So you want to make sure that you’re comfortable opening up with that person and that your personalities kind of go together. In that way, you feel comfortable talking to them, and you feel comfortable sharing details about your finances, and you don’t feel like you have to hold back because either personalities clash or because you’re not really comfortable opening up with them.

[00:23:03] TU: Great overview. As we always say, shout out to Justin here who does our business development and our discovery calls on the front end, it has to be a good fit from both ends, right? If you as a client are going to make an investment of time and money, and our planning time is going to make an investment in that relationship as well, there has to be a good fit, and that starts with expectations in terms of folks being on the same page. I think that starts with making sure you’re comfortable what that relationship looks like and by asking some good questions, as Kim just highlighted there. 

Kim, do you have an anonymous success story or two that you can share of clients of YFP Planning that really highlights the impact that a CFP can have and that the planning team can also have at large?
 

[00:23:46] KB: Yeah. I actually have a really good example. I had even mentioned it to Robert to make sure he was okay with me sharing. When I told him the example that I was going to use, he was completely on board with it, so I’m excited. But we had these long-term clients. They’ve been around with YFP I think longer than I have, but they had gone through residency. The wife had already graduated, and she was in her career. But the husband was still in residency. It was cool to be able to watch him finish his residency program. 

 Then once he had finished, they moved states to be closer to where he had received a job. They were living in a townhome, and they had done a couple of budgeting meetings with us, make sure they were saving correctly and make sure that they were saving enough for retirement. Then the question came about. They were like, “Well, we want to buy a house.” Behind the scenes, they had done all the math to figure out how long they needed to save in order to have that 20 percent down payment that we always hear about when it comes to home buying. 

They had figured out that it was going to take them five years to save a 20 percent down payment, and they were really in the dumps about it. Like they enjoyed where they live, but they also wanted to be homeowners. They wanted to get that next chapter in their life started. So we had a call with them. We could kind of tell that they were down in the dumps about it being five more years before they could even really begin to seriously look at houses and put in offers and everything. Then we made the recommendation to them. We told them like, “You are eligible for a doctor loan, which with the doctor loan, you don’t have to have the 20 percent down payment.” So we went through the whole process of educating them on what a doctor loan is and what those terms look like and like why they don’t need the 20 percent down payment. 

Then it was literally like 30 days to the mark after that conversation. They were closing on their first house without a 20 percent down payment. At this point, they’ve probably moved in. I haven’t talked to them lately, though. But it was awesome to be able to help them realize like, “Hey, we don’t have to wait five years to buy a house. We can buy a house now.” So they were over the moon, they had found a home and that the home ownership chapter was beginning. It was awesome to watch, and it also just made me realize, and they even mentioned it. Like without the YFP Planning team, like who knows if they would have ever even known what a doctor loan was, and that it could have been five more years before they actually got in the home. So it was awesome to be able to help them make that transition into the next chapter of their life.

[00:26:24] TU: I love that story. Thanks for sharing. What I love about that too is when we think about the pharmacists home loan, doctor loan products, we’ve talked about them on the podcast before, one of the I think challenges that can be there is if folks aren’t really evaluating that home purchase in the context of the rest of the financial plan, is that home-buying can be exciting. It can be emotional. It can be stressful. We can easily find ourselves down a path of the home purchase that may not jive with the rest of the financial plan. 

You are here. Robert is with a client and not only being able to open up a new avenue that maybe wasn’t considered to make this home purchase a reality, but also considering and evaluating that and the rest of the financial plan. So how does a home purchase fit with also making sure we’re progressing for retirement and with other financial goals as well? So really cool story to share, and I think one of the things that you and the planning team do so well is striking this balance between taking care of our future selves but also living a rich life today. Both are really important, and that’s a great story and example of why it is. 

Kim, thank you so much for taking time, number one, to come on the show, and excited to get you in front of the YFP community, if folks don’t know who you are, aren’t familiar with you yet. Again, congratulations on all the hard work that went into getting the CFP. I would remind folks that we’ve got a great guide an overview of the nuts and bolts to hiring a financial planner. You can download that for free at yourfinancialpharmacist.com/nutsandbolts. 

Then for folks that are hearing this and saying, “Hey, I’d love to learn more about the planning services offered by Kim and the rest of the team at YFP Planning,” you can book a free discovery call with Justin Woods, our Director of Business Development. You can do that by going to yfpplanning.com. So, Kim, again, thank you so much. 

[00:28:11] KB: Yeah, thank you for having me.

[END OF INTERVIEW] 

[00:28:13] TU: Before we wrap up today’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast, I want to, again, thank our sponsor, Splash Financial. If you’ve ever considered refinancing your loans, check your rate now through Splash Financial. If you qualify, refinancing could help get you a lower monthly payment on your student loans or get a lower interest rate. Splash helps you shop and compare loan refinancing offers across lenders nationwide. Browsing rates through Splash Financial is fast, free, and won’t impact your credit until you complete a full application. 

Now, when you successfully refinance $50,000 or more, Splash Financial will give you an extra $500 in cash bonus using our link, splashfinancial.com/yfp. So check your rate today and see what you might be able to save at splashfinancial.com/yfp. 

As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding material should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. 

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts, and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of Your Financial Pharmacist, unless otherwise noted, and constitute judgments as of the date published. Such information may contain forward-looking statements which are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. 

Thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week.

[END] 

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]